* gdb.texinfo (Print Settings): Document `set print
[binutils-gdb.git] / gdb / doc / gdb.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c
4 @c %**start of header
5 @c makeinfo ignores cmds prev to setfilename, so its arg cannot make use
6 @c of @set vars. However, you can override filename with makeinfo -o.
7 @setfilename gdb.info
8 @c
9 @include gdb-cfg.texi
10 @c
11 @ifset GENERIC
12 @settitle Debugging with @value{GDBN}
13 @end ifset
14 @ifclear GENERIC
15 @settitle Debugging with @value{GDBN} (@value{TARGET})
16 @end ifclear
17 @setchapternewpage odd
18 @c %**end of header
19
20 @iftex
21 @c @smallbook
22 @c @cropmarks
23 @end iftex
24
25 @finalout
26 @syncodeindex ky cp
27
28 @c readline appendices use @vindex
29 @syncodeindex vr cp
30
31 @c !!set GDB manual's edition---not the same as GDB version!
32 @set EDITION 4.11
33
34 @c !!set GDB manual's revision date
35 @set DATE November 1993
36
37 @c GDB CHANGELOG CONSULTED BETWEEN:
38 @c Fri Oct 11 23:27:06 1991 John Gilmore (gnu at cygnus.com)
39 @c Sat Dec 22 02:51:40 1990 John Gilmore (gnu at cygint)
40
41 @c THIS MANUAL REQUIRES TEXINFO-2 macros and info-makers to format properly.
42
43 @ifinfo
44 @c This is a dir.info fragment to support semi-automated addition of
45 @c manuals to an info tree. zoo@cygnus.com is developing this facility.
46 @format
47 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
48 * Gdb:: The GNU debugger.
49 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
50 @end format
51 @end ifinfo
52 @c
53 @c
54 @ifinfo
55 This file documents the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
56
57
58 This is Edition @value{EDITION}, @value{DATE},
59 of @cite{Debugging with @value{GDBN}: the GNU Source-Level Debugger}
60 for GDB Version @value{GDBVN}.
61
62 Copyright (C) 1988, '89, '90, '91, '92, '93 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
63
64 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
65 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
66 are preserved on all copies.
67
68 @ignore
69 Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
70 results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
71 notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
72 (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
73
74 @end ignore
75 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
76 manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
77 entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
78 permission notice identical to this one.
79
80 Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
81 into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
82 @end ifinfo
83
84 @titlepage
85 @title Debugging with @value{GDBN}
86 @subtitle The GNU Source-Level Debugger
87 @ifclear GENERIC
88 @subtitle (@value{TARGET})
89 @end ifclear
90 @sp 1
91 @subtitle Edition @value{EDITION}, for @value{GDBN} version @value{GDBVN}
92 @subtitle @value{DATE}
93 @author Richard M. Stallman and Roland H. Pesch
94 @page
95 @tex
96 {\parskip=0pt
97 \hfill (Send bugs and comments on @value{GDBN} to bug-gdb\@prep.ai.mit.edu.)\par
98 \hfill {\it Debugging with @value{GDBN}}\par
99 \hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
100 \hfill pesch\@cygnus.com\par
101 }
102 @end tex
103
104 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
105 Copyright @copyright{} 1988, '89, '90, '91, '92, '93 Free Software
106 Foundation, Inc.
107 @sp 2
108 Published by the Free Software Foundation @*
109 675 Massachusetts Avenue, @*
110 Cambridge, MA 02139 USA @*
111 Printed copies are available for $20 each. @*
112 ISBN 1-882114-11-6 @*
113
114 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
115 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
116 are preserved on all copies.
117
118 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
119 manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
120 entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
121 permission notice identical to this one.
122
123 Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
124 into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
125 @end titlepage
126 @page
127
128 @ifinfo
129 @node Top
130 @top Debugging with @value{GDBN}
131
132 This file describes @value{GDBN}, the GNU symbolic debugger.
133
134 This is Edition @value{EDITION}, @value{DATE}, for GDB Version @value{GDBVN}.
135
136 @menu
137 * Summary:: Summary of @value{GDBN}
138 @ifset NOVEL
139 * New Features:: New features since GDB version 3.5
140 @end ifset
141 @ifclear BARETARGET
142 * Sample Session:: A sample @value{GDBN} session
143 @end ifclear
144
145 * Invocation:: Getting in and out of @value{GDBN}
146 * Commands:: @value{GDBN} commands
147 * Running:: Running programs under @value{GDBN}
148 * Stopping:: Stopping and continuing
149 * Stack:: Examining the stack
150 * Source:: Examining source files
151 * Data:: Examining data
152 @ifclear CONLY
153 * Languages:: Using @value{GDBN} with different languages
154 @end ifclear
155 @ifset CONLY
156 * C:: C language support
157 @end ifset
158 @c remnant makeinfo bug, blank line needed after two end-ifs?
159
160 * Symbols:: Examining the symbol table
161 * Altering:: Altering execution
162 * GDB Files:: @value{GDBN} files
163 * Targets:: Specifying a debugging target
164 * Controlling GDB:: Controlling @value{GDBN}
165 * Sequences:: Canned sequences of commands
166 @ifclear DOSHOST
167 * Emacs:: Using @value{GDBN} under GNU Emacs
168 @end ifclear
169
170 * GDB Bugs:: Reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
171 * Command Line Editing:: Facilities of the readline library
172 * Using History Interactively::
173 @ifset NOVEL
174 * Renamed Commands::
175 @end ifset
176 @ifclear PRECONFIGURED
177 * Formatting Documentation:: How to format and print GDB documentation
178 * Installing GDB:: Installing GDB
179 @end ifclear
180
181 * Index:: Index
182 @end menu
183 @end ifinfo
184
185 @node Summary
186 @unnumbered Summary of @value{GDBN}
187
188 The purpose of a debugger such as @value{GDBN} is to allow you to see what is
189 going on ``inside'' another program while it executes---or what another
190 program was doing at the moment it crashed.
191
192 @value{GDBN} can do four main kinds of things (plus other things in support of
193 these) to help you catch bugs in the act:
194
195 @itemize @bullet
196 @item
197 Start your program, specifying anything that might affect its behavior.
198
199 @item
200 Make your program stop on specified conditions.
201
202 @item
203 Examine what has happened, when your program has stopped.
204
205 @item
206 Change things in your program, so you can experiment with correcting the
207 effects of one bug and go on to learn about another.
208 @end itemize
209
210 @ifclear CONLY
211 You can use @value{GDBN} to debug programs written in C or C++.
212 @c "MOD2" used as a "miscellaneous languages" flag here.
213 @c This is acceptable while there is no real doc for Chill and Pascal.
214 @ifclear MOD2
215 For more information, see @ref{Support,,Supported languages}.
216 @end ifclear
217 @ifset MOD2
218 For more information, see @ref{C,,C and C++}.
219
220 Support for Modula-2 and Chill is partial. For information on Modula-2,
221 see @ref{Modula-2,,Modula-2}. There is no further documentation on Chill yet.
222
223 Debugging Pascal programs which use sets, subranges, file variables, or nested
224 functions does not currently work. @value{GDBN} does not support
225 entering expressions, printing values, or similar features using Pascal syntax.
226 @end ifset
227 @ifset FORTRAN
228 @cindex Fortran
229 @value{GDBN} can be used to debug programs written in Fortran, although
230 it does not yet support entering expressions, printing values, or
231 similar features using Fortran syntax. It may be necessary to refer to
232 some variables with a trailing underscore.
233 @end ifset
234 @end ifclear
235
236 @menu
237 * Free Software:: Freely redistributable software
238 * Contributors:: Contributors to GDB
239 @end menu
240
241 @node Free Software
242 @unnumberedsec Free software
243
244 @value{GDBN} is @dfn{free software}, protected by the GNU General Public License
245 (GPL). The GPL gives you the freedom to copy or adapt a licensed
246 program---but every person getting a copy also gets with it the
247 freedom to modify that copy (which means that they must get access to
248 the source code), and the freedom to distribute further copies.
249 Typical software companies use copyrights to limit your freedoms; the
250 Free Software Foundation uses the GPL to preserve these freedoms.
251
252 Fundamentally, the General Public License is a license which says that
253 you have these freedoms and that you cannot take these freedoms away
254 from anyone else.
255
256 @node Contributors
257 @unnumberedsec Contributors to GDB
258
259 Richard Stallman was the original author of GDB, and of many other GNU
260 programs. Many others have contributed to its development. This
261 section attempts to credit major contributors. One of the virtues of
262 free software is that everyone is free to contribute to it; with
263 regret, we cannot actually acknowledge everyone here. The file
264 @file{ChangeLog} in the GDB distribution approximates a blow-by-blow
265 account.
266
267 Changes much prior to version 2.0 are lost in the mists of time.
268
269 @quotation
270 @emph{Plea:} Additions to this section are particularly welcome. If you
271 or your friends (or enemies, to be evenhanded) have been unfairly
272 omitted from this list, we would like to add your names!
273 @end quotation
274
275 So that they may not regard their long labor as thankless, we
276 particularly thank those who shepherded GDB through major releases: Fred
277 Fish (releases 4.11, 4.10, 4.9), Stu Grossman and John Gilmore (releases
278 4.8, 4.7, 4.6, 4.5, 4.4), John Gilmore (releases 4.3, 4.2, 4.1, 4.0, and
279 3.9); Jim Kingdon (releases 3.5, 3.4, 3.3); and Randy Smith (releases
280 3.2, 3.1, 3.0). As major maintainer of GDB for some period, each
281 contributed significantly to the structure, stability, and capabilities
282 of the entire debugger.
283
284 Richard Stallman, assisted at various times by Peter TerMaat, Chris
285 Hanson, and Richard Mlynarik, handled releases through 2.8.
286
287 @ifclear CONLY
288 Michael Tiemann is the author of most of the GNU C++ support in GDB,
289 with significant additional contributions from Per Bothner. James
290 Clark wrote the GNU C++ demangler. Early work on C++ was by Peter
291 TerMaat (who also did much general update work leading to release 3.0).
292 @end ifclear
293
294 GDB 4 uses the BFD subroutine library to examine multiple
295 object-file formats; BFD was a joint project of David V.
296 Henkel-Wallace, Rich Pixley, Steve Chamberlain, and John Gilmore.
297
298 David Johnson wrote the original COFF support; Pace Willison did
299 the original support for encapsulated COFF.
300
301 Adam de Boor and Bradley Davis contributed the ISI Optimum V support.
302 Per Bothner, Noboyuki Hikichi, and Alessandro Forin contributed MIPS
303 support. Jean-Daniel Fekete contributed Sun 386i support. Chris
304 Hanson improved the HP9000 support. Noboyuki Hikichi and Tomoyuki
305 Hasei contributed Sony/News OS 3 support. David Johnson contributed
306 Encore Umax support. Jyrki Kuoppala contributed Altos 3068 support.
307 Keith Packard contributed NS32K support. Doug Rabson contributed
308 Acorn Risc Machine support. Chris Smith contributed Convex support
309 (and Fortran debugging). Jonathan Stone contributed Pyramid support.
310 Michael Tiemann contributed SPARC support. Tim Tucker contributed
311 support for the Gould NP1 and Gould Powernode. Pace Willison
312 contributed Intel 386 support. Jay Vosburgh contributed Symmetry
313 support.
314
315 Rich Schaefer and Peter Schauer helped with support of SunOS shared
316 libraries.
317
318 Jay Fenlason and Roland McGrath ensured that GDB and GAS agree about
319 several machine instruction sets.
320
321 Patrick Duval, Ted Goldstein, Vikram Koka and Glenn Engel helped
322 develop remote debugging. Intel Corporation and Wind River Systems
323 contributed remote debugging modules for their products.
324
325 Brian Fox is the author of the readline libraries providing
326 command-line editing and command history.
327
328 Andrew Beers of SUNY Buffalo wrote the language-switching code,
329 @ifset MOD2
330 the Modula-2 support,
331 @end ifset
332 and contributed the Languages chapter of this manual.
333
334 Fred Fish wrote most of the support for Unix System Vr4.
335 @ifclear CONLY
336 He also enhanced the command-completion support to cover C++ overloaded
337 symbols.
338 @end ifclear
339
340 Hitachi America, Ltd. sponsored the support for Hitachi microprocessors.
341
342 @ifset NOVEL
343 @node New Features
344 @unnumbered New Features since GDB Version 3.5
345
346 @table @emph
347 @item Targets
348 Using the new command @code{target}, you can select at runtime whether
349 you are debugging local files, local processes, standalone systems over
350 a serial port, or realtime systems over a TCP/IP connection. The
351 command @code{load} can download programs into a remote system. Serial
352 stubs are available for Motorola 680x0, Intel 80386, and Sparc remote
353 systems; GDB also supports debugging realtime processes running under
354 VxWorks, using SunRPC Remote Procedure Calls over TCP/IP to talk to a
355 debugger stub on the target system. Internally, GDB now uses a function
356 vector to mediate access to different targets; if you need to add your
357 own support for a remote protocol, this makes it much easier.
358
359 @item Watchpoints
360 GDB now sports watchpoints as well as breakpoints. You can use a
361 watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an expression
362 changes, without having to predict a particular place in your program
363 where this may happen.
364
365 @item Wide Output
366 Commands that issue wide output now insert newlines at places designed
367 to make the output more readable.
368
369 @item Object Code Formats
370 GDB uses a new library called the Binary File Descriptor (BFD) Library
371 to permit it to switch dynamically, without reconfiguration or
372 recompilation, between different object-file formats. Formats currently
373 supported are COFF, ELF, a.out, Intel 960 b.out, MIPS ECOFF, HPPA SOM
374 (with stabs debugging), and S-records; files may be read as .o files,
375 archive libraries, or core dumps. BFD is available as a subroutine
376 library so that other programs may take advantage of it, and the other
377 GNU binary utilities are being converted to use it.
378
379 @item Configuration and Ports
380 Compile-time configuration (to select a particular architecture and
381 operating system) is much easier. The script @code{configure} now
382 allows you to configure GDB as either a native debugger or a
383 cross-debugger. @xref{Installing GDB}, for details on how to
384 configure.
385
386 @item Interaction
387 The user interface to the GDB control variables is simpler,
388 and is consolidated in two commands, @code{set} and @code{show}. Output
389 lines are now broken at readable places, rather than overflowing onto
390 the next line. You can suppress output of machine-level addresses,
391 displaying only source language information.
392
393 @item C++
394 GDB now supports C++ multiple inheritance (if used with a GCC
395 version 2 compiler), and also has limited support for C++ exception
396 handling, with the commands @code{catch} and @code{info catch}: GDB
397 can break when an exception is raised, before the stack is peeled back
398 to the exception handler's context.
399
400 @ifset MOD2
401 @item Modula-2
402 GDB now has preliminary support for the GNU Modula-2 compiler, currently
403 under development at the State University of New York at Buffalo.
404 Coordinated development of both GDB and the GNU Modula-2 compiler will
405 continue. Other Modula-2 compilers are currently not supported, and
406 attempting to debug programs compiled with them will likely result in an
407 error as the symbol table of the executable is read in.
408 @end ifset
409
410 @item Command Rationalization
411 Many GDB commands have been renamed to make them easier to remember
412 and use. In particular, the subcommands of @code{info} and
413 @code{show}/@code{set} are grouped to make the former refer to the state
414 of your program, and the latter refer to the state of GDB itself.
415 @xref{Renamed Commands}, for details on what commands were renamed.
416
417 @item Shared Libraries
418 GDB 4 can debug programs and core files that use SunOS, SVR4, or IBM RS/6000
419 shared libraries.
420
421 @item Threads
422 On some systems, GDB 4 has facilities to debug multi-thread programs.
423
424 @item Reference Card
425 GDB 4 has a reference card. @xref{Formatting Documentation,,Formatting
426 the Documentation}, for instructions about how to print it.
427 @end table
428 @end ifset
429
430 @ifclear BARETARGET
431 @node Sample Session
432 @chapter A Sample @value{GDBN} Session
433
434 You can use this manual at your leisure to read all about @value{GDBN}.
435 However, a handful of commands are enough to get started using the
436 debugger. This chapter illustrates those commands.
437
438 @iftex
439 In this sample session, we emphasize user input like this: @b{input},
440 to make it easier to pick out from the surrounding output.
441 @end iftex
442
443 @c FIXME: this example may not be appropriate for some configs, where
444 @c FIXME...primary interest is in remote use.
445
446 One of the preliminary versions of GNU @code{m4} (a generic macro
447 processor) exhibits the following bug: sometimes, when we change its
448 quote strings from the default, the commands used to capture one macro
449 definition within another stop working. In the following short @code{m4}
450 session, we define a macro @code{foo} which expands to @code{0000}; we
451 then use the @code{m4} built-in @code{defn} to define @code{bar} as the
452 same thing. However, when we change the open quote string to
453 @code{<QUOTE>} and the close quote string to @code{<UNQUOTE>}, the same
454 procedure fails to define a new synonym @code{baz}:
455
456 @smallexample
457 $ @b{cd gnu/m4}
458 $ @b{./m4}
459 @b{define(foo,0000)}
460
461 @b{foo}
462 0000
463 @b{define(bar,defn(`foo'))}
464
465 @b{bar}
466 0000
467 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
468
469 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
470 @b{baz}
471 @b{C-d}
472 m4: End of input: 0: fatal error: EOF in string
473 @end smallexample
474
475 @noindent
476 Let us use @value{GDBN} to try to see what is going on.
477
478 @smallexample
479 $ @b{@value{GDBP} m4}
480 @c FIXME: this falsifies the exact text played out, to permit smallbook
481 @c FIXME... format to come out better.
482 GDB is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies
483 of it under certain conditions; type "show copying" to see
484 the conditions.
485 There is absolutely no warranty for GDB; type "show warranty"
486 for details.
487 GDB @value{GDBVN}, Copyright 1993 Free Software Foundation, Inc...
488 (@value{GDBP})
489 @end smallexample
490
491 @noindent
492 @value{GDBN} reads only enough symbol data to know where to find the rest when
493 needed; as a result, the first prompt comes up very quickly. We now
494 tell @value{GDBN} to use a narrower display width than usual, so that examples
495 will fit in this manual.
496
497 @smallexample
498 (@value{GDBP}) @b{set width 70}
499 @end smallexample
500
501 @noindent
502 We need to see how the @code{m4} built-in @code{changequote} works.
503 Having looked at the source, we know the relevant subroutine is
504 @code{m4_changequote}, so we set a breakpoint there with the @value{GDBN}
505 @code{break} command.
506
507 @smallexample
508 (@value{GDBP}) @b{break m4_changequote}
509 Breakpoint 1 at 0x62f4: file builtin.c, line 879.
510 @end smallexample
511
512 @noindent
513 Using the @code{run} command, we start @code{m4} running under @value{GDBN}
514 control; as long as control does not reach the @code{m4_changequote}
515 subroutine, the program runs as usual:
516
517 @smallexample
518 (@value{GDBP}) @b{run}
519 Starting program: /work/Editorial/gdb/gnu/m4/m4
520 @b{define(foo,0000)}
521
522 @b{foo}
523 0000
524 @end smallexample
525
526 @noindent
527 To trigger the breakpoint, we call @code{changequote}. @value{GDBN}
528 suspends execution of @code{m4}, displaying information about the
529 context where it stops.
530
531 @smallexample
532 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
533
534 Breakpoint 1, m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
535 at builtin.c:879
536 879 if (bad_argc(TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[0]),argc,1,3))
537 @end smallexample
538
539 @noindent
540 Now we use the command @code{n} (@code{next}) to advance execution to
541 the next line of the current function.
542
543 @smallexample
544 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
545 882 set_quotes((argc >= 2) ? TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[1])\
546 : nil,
547 @end smallexample
548
549 @noindent
550 @code{set_quotes} looks like a promising subroutine. We can go into it
551 by using the command @code{s} (@code{step}) instead of @code{next}.
552 @code{step} goes to the next line to be executed in @emph{any}
553 subroutine, so it steps into @code{set_quotes}.
554
555 @smallexample
556 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
557 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
558 at input.c:530
559 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
560 @end smallexample
561
562 @noindent
563 The display that shows the subroutine where @code{m4} is now
564 suspended (and its arguments) is called a stack frame display. It
565 shows a summary of the stack. We can use the @code{backtrace}
566 command (which can also be spelled @code{bt}), to see where we are
567 in the stack as a whole: the @code{backtrace} command displays a
568 stack frame for each active subroutine.
569
570 @smallexample
571 (@value{GDBP}) @b{bt}
572 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
573 at input.c:530
574 #1 0x6344 in m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
575 at builtin.c:882
576 #2 0x8174 in expand_macro (sym=0x33320) at macro.c:242
577 #3 0x7a88 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=209696, td=0xf7fffa30)
578 at macro.c:71
579 #4 0x79dc in expand_input () at macro.c:40
580 #5 0x2930 in main (argc=0, argv=0xf7fffb20) at m4.c:195
581 @end smallexample
582
583 @noindent
584 We will step through a few more lines to see what happens. The first two
585 times, we can use @samp{s}; the next two times we use @code{n} to avoid
586 falling into the @code{xstrdup} subroutine.
587
588 @smallexample
589 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
590 0x3b5c 532 if (rquote != def_rquote)
591 (@value{GDBP}) @b{s}
592 0x3b80 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? \
593 def_lquote : xstrdup(lq);
594 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
595 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
596 : xstrdup(rq);
597 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
598 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
599 @end smallexample
600
601 @noindent
602 The last line displayed looks a little odd; we can examine the variables
603 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} to see if they are in fact the new left
604 and right quotes we specified. We use the command @code{p}
605 (@code{print}) to see their values.
606
607 @smallexample
608 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p lquote}
609 $1 = 0x35d40 "<QUOTE>"
610 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p rquote}
611 $2 = 0x35d50 "<UNQUOTE>"
612 @end smallexample
613
614 @noindent
615 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} are indeed the new left and right quotes.
616 To look at some context, we can display ten lines of source
617 surrounding the current line with the @code{l} (@code{list}) command.
618
619 @smallexample
620 (@value{GDBP}) @b{l}
621 533 xfree(rquote);
622 534
623 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? def_lquote\
624 : xstrdup (lq);
625 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
626 : xstrdup (rq);
627 537
628 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
629 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
630 540 @}
631 541
632 542 void
633 @end smallexample
634
635 @noindent
636 Let us step past the two lines that set @code{len_lquote} and
637 @code{len_rquote}, and then examine the values of those variables.
638
639 @smallexample
640 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
641 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
642 (@value{GDBP}) @b{n}
643 540 @}
644 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote}
645 $3 = 9
646 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote}
647 $4 = 7
648 @end smallexample
649
650 @noindent
651 That certainly looks wrong, assuming @code{len_lquote} and
652 @code{len_rquote} are meant to be the lengths of @code{lquote} and
653 @code{rquote} respectively. We can set them to better values using
654 the @code{p} command, since it can print the value of
655 any expression---and that expression can include subroutine calls and
656 assignments.
657
658 @smallexample
659 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_lquote=strlen(lquote)}
660 $5 = 7
661 (@value{GDBP}) @b{p len_rquote=strlen(rquote)}
662 $6 = 9
663 @end smallexample
664
665 @noindent
666 Is that enough to fix the problem of using the new quotes with the
667 @code{m4} built-in @code{defn}? We can allow @code{m4} to continue
668 executing with the @code{c} (@code{continue}) command, and then try the
669 example that caused trouble initially:
670
671 @smallexample
672 (@value{GDBP}) @b{c}
673 Continuing.
674
675 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
676
677 baz
678 0000
679 @end smallexample
680
681 @noindent
682 Success! The new quotes now work just as well as the default ones. The
683 problem seems to have been just the two typos defining the wrong
684 lengths. We allow @code{m4} exit by giving it an EOF as input:
685
686 @smallexample
687 @b{C-d}
688 Program exited normally.
689 @end smallexample
690
691 @noindent
692 The message @samp{Program exited normally.} is from @value{GDBN}; it
693 indicates @code{m4} has finished executing. We can end our @value{GDBN}
694 session with the @value{GDBN} @code{quit} command.
695
696 @smallexample
697 (@value{GDBP}) @b{quit}
698 @end smallexample
699 @end ifclear
700
701 @node Invocation
702 @chapter Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}
703
704 This chapter discusses how to start @value{GDBN}, and how to get out of it.
705 (The essentials: type @samp{@value{GDBP}} to start GDB, and type @kbd{quit}
706 or @kbd{C-d} to exit.)
707
708 @menu
709 * Invoking GDB:: How to start @value{GDBN}
710 * Quitting GDB:: How to quit @value{GDBN}
711 * Shell Commands:: How to use shell commands inside @value{GDBN}
712 @end menu
713
714 @node Invoking GDB
715 @section Invoking @value{GDBN}
716
717 @ifset H8EXCLUSIVE
718 For details on starting up @value{GDBP} as a
719 remote debugger attached to a Hitachi microprocessor, see @ref{Hitachi
720 Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}.
721 @end ifset
722
723 Invoke @value{GDBN} by running the program @code{@value{GDBP}}. Once started,
724 @value{GDBN} reads commands from the terminal until you tell it to exit.
725
726 You can also run @code{@value{GDBP}} with a variety of arguments and options,
727 to specify more of your debugging environment at the outset.
728
729 @ifset GENERIC
730 The command-line options described here are designed
731 to cover a variety of situations; in some environments, some of these
732 options may effectively be unavailable.
733 @end ifset
734
735 The most usual way to start @value{GDBN} is with one argument,
736 specifying an executable program:
737
738 @example
739 @value{GDBP} @var{program}
740 @end example
741
742 @ifclear BARETARGET
743 @noindent
744 You can also start with both an executable program and a core file
745 specified:
746
747 @example
748 @value{GDBP} @var{program} @var{core}
749 @end example
750
751 You can, instead, specify a process ID as a second argument, if you want
752 to debug a running process:
753
754 @example
755 @value{GDBP} @var{program} 1234
756 @end example
757
758 @noindent
759 would attach @value{GDBN} to process @code{1234} (unless you also have a file
760 named @file{1234}; @value{GDBN} does check for a core file first).
761
762 Taking advantage of the second command-line argument requires a fairly
763 complete operating system; when you use @value{GDBN} as a remote debugger
764 attached to a bare board, there may not be any notion of ``process'',
765 and there is often no way to get a core dump.
766 @end ifclear
767
768 @noindent
769 You can further control how @value{GDBN} starts up by using command-line
770 options. @value{GDBN} itself can remind you of the options available.
771
772 @noindent
773 Type
774
775 @example
776 @value{GDBP} -help
777 @end example
778
779 @noindent
780 to display all available options and briefly describe their use
781 (@samp{@value{GDBP} -h} is a shorter equivalent).
782
783 All options and command line arguments you give are processed
784 in sequential order. The order makes a difference when the
785 @samp{-x} option is used.
786
787
788 @menu
789 @ifclear GENERIC
790 @ifset REMOTESTUB
791 * Remote Serial:: @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol
792 @end ifset
793 @ifset I960
794 * i960-Nindy Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)
795 @end ifset
796 @ifset AMD29K
797 * UDI29K Remote:: The UDI protocol for AMD29K
798 * EB29K Remote:: The EBMON protocol for AMD29K
799 @end ifset
800 @ifset VXWORKS
801 * VxWorks Remote:: @value{GDBN} and VxWorks
802 @end ifset
803 @ifset ST2000
804 * ST2000 Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000
805 @end ifset
806 @ifset H8
807 * Hitachi Remote:: @value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors
808 @end ifset
809 @ifset MIPS
810 * MIPS Remote:: @value{GDBN} and MIPS boards
811 @end ifset
812 @ifset SIMS
813 * Simulator:: Simulated CPU target
814 @end ifset
815 @end ifclear
816 @c remnant makeinfo bug requires this blank line after *two* end-ifblahs:
817
818 * File Options:: Choosing files
819 * Mode Options:: Choosing modes
820 @end menu
821
822 @ifclear GENERIC
823 @include remote.texi
824 @end ifclear
825
826 @node File Options
827 @subsection Choosing files
828
829 @ifclear BARETARGET
830 When @value{GDBN} starts, it reads any arguments other than options as
831 specifying an executable file and core file (or process ID). This is
832 the same as if the arguments were specified by the @samp{-se} and
833 @samp{-c} options respectively. (@value{GDBN} reads the first argument
834 that does not have an associated option flag as equivalent to the
835 @samp{-se} option followed by that argument; and the second argument
836 that does not have an associated option flag, if any, as equivalent to
837 the @samp{-c} option followed by that argument.)
838 @end ifclear
839 @ifset BARETARGET
840 When @value{GDBN} starts, it reads any argument other than options as
841 specifying an executable file. This is the same as if the argument was
842 specified by the @samp{-se} option.
843 @end ifset
844
845 Many options have both long and short forms; both are shown in the
846 following list. @value{GDBN} also recognizes the long forms if you truncate
847 them, so long as enough of the option is present to be unambiguous.
848 (If you prefer, you can flag option arguments with @samp{--} rather
849 than @samp{-}, though we illustrate the more usual convention.)
850
851 @table @code
852 @item -symbols @var{file}
853 @itemx -s @var{file}
854 Read symbol table from file @var{file}.
855
856 @item -exec @var{file}
857 @itemx -e @var{file}
858 Use file @var{file} as the executable file to execute when
859 @ifset BARETARGET
860 appropriate.
861 @end ifset
862 @ifclear BARETARGET
863 appropriate, and for examining pure data in conjunction with a core
864 dump.
865 @end ifclear
866
867 @item -se @var{file}
868 Read symbol table from file @var{file} and use it as the executable
869 file.
870
871 @ifclear BARETARGET
872 @item -core @var{file}
873 @itemx -c @var{file}
874 Use file @var{file} as a core dump to examine.
875
876 @item -c @var{number}
877 Connect to process ID @var{number}, as with the @code{attach} command
878 (unless there is a file in core-dump format named @var{number}, in which
879 case @samp{-c} specifies that file as a core dump to read).
880 @end ifclear
881
882 @item -command @var{file}
883 @itemx -x @var{file}
884 Execute @value{GDBN} commands from file @var{file}. @xref{Command
885 Files,, Command files}.
886
887 @item -directory @var{directory}
888 @itemx -d @var{directory}
889 Add @var{directory} to the path to search for source files.
890
891 @ifclear BARETARGET
892 @item -m
893 @itemx -mapped
894 @emph{Warning: this option depends on operating system facilities that are not
895 supported on all systems.}@*
896 If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the @code{mmap}
897 system call, you can use this option
898 to have @value{GDBN} write the symbols from your
899 program into a reusable file in the current directory. If the program you are debugging is
900 called @file{/tmp/fred}, the mapped symbol file will be @file{./fred.syms}.
901 Future @value{GDBN} debugging sessions will notice the presence of this file,
902 and will quickly map in symbol information from it, rather than reading
903 the symbol table from the executable program.
904
905 @c FIXME! Really host, not target?
906 The @file{.syms} file is specific to the host machine where @value{GDBN}
907 is run. It holds an exact image of the internal @value{GDBN} symbol
908 table. It cannot be shared across multiple host platforms.
909 @end ifclear
910
911 @item -r
912 @itemx -readnow
913 Read each symbol file's entire symbol table immediately, rather than
914 the default, which is to read it incrementally as it is needed.
915 This makes startup slower, but makes future operations faster.
916 @end table
917
918 @ifclear BARETARGET
919 The @code{-mapped} and @code{-readnow} options are typically combined in
920 order to build a @file{.syms} file that contains complete symbol
921 information. (@xref{Files,,Commands to specify files}, for information
922 on @file{.syms} files.) A simple GDB invocation to do nothing but build
923 a @file{.syms} file for future use is:
924
925 @example
926 gdb -batch -nx -mapped -readnow programname
927 @end example
928 @end ifclear
929
930 @node Mode Options
931 @subsection Choosing modes
932
933 You can run @value{GDBN} in various alternative modes---for example, in
934 batch mode or quiet mode.
935
936 @table @code
937 @item -nx
938 @itemx -n
939 Do not execute commands from any initialization files (normally called
940 @file{@value{GDBINIT}}). Normally, the commands in these files are
941 executed after all the command options and arguments have been
942 processed. @xref{Command Files,,Command files}.
943
944 @item -quiet
945 @itemx -q
946 ``Quiet''. Do not print the introductory and copyright messages. These
947 messages are also suppressed in batch mode.
948
949 @item -batch
950 Run in batch mode. Exit with status @code{0} after processing all the
951 command files specified with @samp{-x} (and all commands from
952 initialization files, if not inhibited with @samp{-n}). Exit with
953 nonzero status if an error occurs in executing the @value{GDBN} commands
954 in the command files.
955
956 Batch mode may be useful for running @value{GDBN} as a filter, for example to
957 download and run a program on another computer; in order to make this
958 more useful, the message
959
960 @example
961 Program exited normally.
962 @end example
963
964 @noindent
965 (which is ordinarily issued whenever a program running under @value{GDBN} control
966 terminates) is not issued when running in batch mode.
967
968 @item -cd @var{directory}
969 Run @value{GDBN} using @var{directory} as its working directory,
970 instead of the current directory.
971
972 @ifset LUCID
973 @item -context @var{authentication}
974 When the Energize programming system starts up @value{GDBN}, it uses this
975 option to trigger an alternate mode of interaction.
976 @var{authentication} is a pair of numeric codes that identify @value{GDBN}
977 as a client in the Energize environment. Avoid this option when you run
978 @value{GDBN} directly from the command line. See @ref{Energize,,Using
979 @value{GDBN} with Energize} for more discussion of using @value{GDBN} with Energize.
980 @end ifset
981
982 @ifclear DOSHOST
983 @item -fullname
984 @itemx -f
985 Emacs sets this option when it runs @value{GDBN} as a subprocess. It tells @value{GDBN}
986 to output the full file name and line number in a standard,
987 recognizable fashion each time a stack frame is displayed (which
988 includes each time your program stops). This recognizable format looks
989 like two @samp{\032} characters, followed by the file name, line number
990 and character position separated by colons, and a newline. The
991 Emacs-to-@value{GDBN} interface program uses the two @samp{\032} characters as
992 a signal to display the source code for the frame.
993 @end ifclear
994
995 @ifset SERIAL
996 @item -b @var{bps}
997 Set the line speed (baud rate or bits per second) of any serial
998 interface used by @value{GDBN} for remote debugging.
999
1000 @item -tty @var{device}
1001 Run using @var{device} for your program's standard input and output.
1002 @c FIXME: kingdon thinks there is more to -tty. Investigate.
1003 @end ifset
1004 @end table
1005
1006 @node Quitting GDB
1007 @section Quitting @value{GDBN}
1008 @cindex exiting @value{GDBN}
1009 @cindex leaving @value{GDBN}
1010
1011 @table @code
1012 @item quit
1013 @kindex quit
1014 @kindex q
1015 To exit @value{GDBN}, use the @code{quit} command (abbreviated @code{q}), or type
1016 an end-of-file character (usually @kbd{C-d}).
1017 @end table
1018
1019 @cindex interrupt
1020 An interrupt (often @kbd{C-c}) will not exit from @value{GDBN}, but rather
1021 will terminate the action of any @value{GDBN} command that is in progress and
1022 return to @value{GDBN} command level. It is safe to type the interrupt
1023 character at any time because @value{GDBN} does not allow it to take effect
1024 until a time when it is safe.
1025
1026 @ifclear BARETARGET
1027 If you have been using @value{GDBN} to control an attached process or
1028 device, you can release it with the @code{detach} command
1029 (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an already-running process}).
1030 @end ifclear
1031
1032 @node Shell Commands
1033 @section Shell commands
1034
1035 If you need to execute occasional shell commands during your
1036 debugging session, there is no need to leave or suspend @value{GDBN}; you can
1037 just use the @code{shell} command.
1038
1039 @table @code
1040 @item shell @var{command string}
1041 @kindex shell
1042 @cindex shell escape
1043 Invoke a the standard shell to execute @var{command string}.
1044 @ifclear DOSHOST
1045 If it exists, the environment variable @code{SHELL} determines which
1046 shell to run. Otherwise @value{GDBN} uses @code{/bin/sh}.
1047 @end ifclear
1048 @end table
1049
1050 The utility @code{make} is often needed in development environments.
1051 You do not have to use the @code{shell} command for this purpose in
1052 @value{GDBN}:
1053
1054 @table @code
1055 @item make @var{make-args}
1056 @kindex make
1057 @cindex calling make
1058 Execute the @code{make} program with the specified
1059 arguments. This is equivalent to @samp{shell make @var{make-args}}.
1060 @end table
1061
1062 @node Commands
1063 @chapter @value{GDBN} Commands
1064
1065 You can abbreviate a @value{GDBN} command to the first few letters of the command
1066 name, if that abbreviation is unambiguous; and you can repeat certain
1067 @value{GDBN} commands by typing just @key{RET}. You can also use the @key{TAB}
1068 key to get @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest of a word in a command (or to
1069 show you the alternatives available, if there is more than one possibility).
1070
1071 @menu
1072 * Command Syntax:: How to give commands to @value{GDBN}
1073 * Completion:: Command completion
1074 * Help:: How to ask @value{GDBN} for help
1075 @end menu
1076
1077 @node Command Syntax
1078 @section Command syntax
1079
1080 A @value{GDBN} command is a single line of input. There is no limit on
1081 how long it can be. It starts with a command name, which is followed by
1082 arguments whose meaning depends on the command name. For example, the
1083 command @code{step} accepts an argument which is the number of times to
1084 step, as in @samp{step 5}. You can also use the @code{step} command
1085 with no arguments. Some command names do not allow any arguments.
1086
1087 @cindex abbreviation
1088 @value{GDBN} command names may always be truncated if that abbreviation is
1089 unambiguous. Other possible command abbreviations are listed in the
1090 documentation for individual commands. In some cases, even ambiguous
1091 abbreviations are allowed; for example, @code{s} is specially defined as
1092 equivalent to @code{step} even though there are other commands whose
1093 names start with @code{s}. You can test abbreviations by using them as
1094 arguments to the @code{help} command.
1095
1096 @cindex repeating commands
1097 @kindex RET
1098 A blank line as input to @value{GDBN} (typing just @key{RET}) means to
1099 repeat the previous command. Certain commands (for example, @code{run})
1100 will not repeat this way; these are commands for which unintentional
1101 repetition might cause trouble and which you are unlikely to want to
1102 repeat.
1103
1104 The @code{list} and @code{x} commands, when you repeat them with
1105 @key{RET}, construct new arguments rather than repeating
1106 exactly as typed. This permits easy scanning of source or memory.
1107
1108 @value{GDBN} can also use @key{RET} in another way: to partition lengthy
1109 output, in a way similar to the common utility @code{more}
1110 (@pxref{Screen Size,,Screen size}). Since it is easy to press one
1111 @key{RET} too many in this situation, @value{GDBN} disables command
1112 repetition after any command that generates this sort of display.
1113
1114 @kindex #
1115 @cindex comment
1116 Any text from a @kbd{#} to the end of the line is a comment; it does
1117 nothing. This is useful mainly in command files (@pxref{Command
1118 Files,,Command files}).
1119
1120 @node Completion
1121 @section Command completion
1122
1123 @cindex completion
1124 @cindex word completion
1125 @value{GDBN} can fill in the rest of a word in a command for you, if there is
1126 only one possibility; it can also show you what the valid possibilities
1127 are for the next word in a command, at any time. This works for @value{GDBN}
1128 commands, @value{GDBN} subcommands, and the names of symbols in your program.
1129
1130 Press the @key{TAB} key whenever you want @value{GDBN} to fill out the rest
1131 of a word. If there is only one possibility, @value{GDBN} will fill in the
1132 word, and wait for you to finish the command (or press @key{RET} to
1133 enter it). For example, if you type
1134
1135 @c FIXME "@key" does not distinguish its argument sufficiently to permit
1136 @c complete accuracy in these examples; space introduced for clarity.
1137 @c If texinfo enhancements make it unnecessary, it would be nice to
1138 @c replace " @key" by "@key" in the following...
1139 @example
1140 (@value{GDBP}) info bre @key{TAB}
1141 @end example
1142
1143 @noindent
1144 @value{GDBN} fills in the rest of the word @samp{breakpoints}, since that is
1145 the only @code{info} subcommand beginning with @samp{bre}:
1146
1147 @example
1148 (@value{GDBP}) info breakpoints
1149 @end example
1150
1151 @noindent
1152 You can either press @key{RET} at this point, to run the @code{info
1153 breakpoints} command, or backspace and enter something else, if
1154 @samp{breakpoints} does not look like the command you expected. (If you
1155 were sure you wanted @code{info breakpoints} in the first place, you
1156 might as well just type @key{RET} immediately after @samp{info bre},
1157 to exploit command abbreviations rather than command completion).
1158
1159 If there is more than one possibility for the next word when you press
1160 @key{TAB}, @value{GDBN} will sound a bell. You can either supply more
1161 characters and try again, or just press @key{TAB} a second time, and
1162 @value{GDBN} will display all the possible completions for that word. For
1163 example, you might want to set a breakpoint on a subroutine whose name
1164 begins with @samp{make_}, but when you type @kbd{b make_@key{TAB}} @value{GDBN}
1165 just sounds the bell. Typing @key{TAB} again will display all the
1166 function names in your program that begin with those characters, for
1167 example:
1168
1169 @example
1170 (@value{GDBP}) b make_ @key{TAB}
1171 @exdent @value{GDBN} sounds bell; press @key{TAB} again, to see:
1172 make_a_section_from_file make_environ
1173 make_abs_section make_function_type
1174 make_blockvector make_pointer_type
1175 make_cleanup make_reference_type
1176 make_command make_symbol_completion_list
1177 (@value{GDBP}) b make_
1178 @end example
1179
1180 @noindent
1181 After displaying the available possibilities, @value{GDBN} copies your
1182 partial input (@samp{b make_} in the example) so you can finish the
1183 command.
1184
1185 If you just want to see the list of alternatives in the first place, you
1186 can press @kbd{M-?} rather than pressing @key{TAB} twice. @kbd{M-?}
1187 means @kbd{@key{META} ?}. You can type this
1188 @ifclear DOSHOST
1189 either by holding down a
1190 key designated as the @key{META} shift on your keyboard (if there is
1191 one) while typing @kbd{?}, or
1192 @end ifclear
1193 as @key{ESC} followed by @kbd{?}.
1194
1195 @cindex quotes in commands
1196 @cindex completion of quoted strings
1197 Sometimes the string you need, while logically a ``word'', may contain
1198 parentheses or other characters that @value{GDBN} normally excludes from its
1199 notion of a word. To permit word completion to work in this situation,
1200 you may enclose words in @code{'} (single quote marks) in @value{GDBN} commands.
1201
1202 @ifclear CONLY
1203 The most likely situation where you might need this is in typing the
1204 name of a C++ function. This is because C++ allows function overloading
1205 (multiple definitions of the same function, distinguished by argument
1206 type). For example, when you want to set a breakpoint you may need to
1207 distinguish whether you mean the version of @code{name} that takes an
1208 @code{int} parameter, @code{name(int)}, or the version that takes a
1209 @code{float} parameter, @code{name(float)}. To use the word-completion
1210 facilities in this situation, type a single quote @code{'} at the
1211 beginning of the function name. This alerts @value{GDBN} that it may need to
1212 consider more information than usual when you press @key{TAB} or
1213 @kbd{M-?} to request word completion:
1214
1215 @example
1216 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble( @key{M-?}
1217 bubble(double,double) bubble(int,int)
1218 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1219 @end example
1220
1221 In some cases, @value{GDBN} can tell that completing a name will require
1222 quotes. When this happens, @value{GDBN} will insert the quote for you (while
1223 completing as much as it can) if you do not type the quote in the first
1224 place:
1225
1226 @example
1227 (@value{GDBP}) b bub @key{TAB}
1228 @exdent @value{GDBN} alters your input line to the following, and rings a bell:
1229 (@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
1230 @end example
1231
1232 @noindent
1233 In general, @value{GDBN} can tell that a quote is needed (and inserts it) if
1234 you have not yet started typing the argument list when you ask for
1235 completion on an overloaded symbol.
1236 @end ifclear
1237
1238
1239 @node Help
1240 @section Getting help
1241 @cindex online documentation
1242 @kindex help
1243
1244 You can always ask @value{GDBN} itself for information on its commands, using the
1245 command @code{help}.
1246
1247 @table @code
1248 @item help
1249 @itemx h
1250 @kindex h
1251 You can use @code{help} (abbreviated @code{h}) with no arguments to
1252 display a short list of named classes of commands:
1253
1254 @smallexample
1255 (@value{GDBP}) help
1256 List of classes of commands:
1257
1258 running -- Running the program
1259 stack -- Examining the stack
1260 data -- Examining data
1261 breakpoints -- Making program stop at certain points
1262 files -- Specifying and examining files
1263 status -- Status inquiries
1264 support -- Support facilities
1265 user-defined -- User-defined commands
1266 aliases -- Aliases of other commands
1267 obscure -- Obscure features
1268
1269 Type "help" followed by a class name for a list of
1270 commands in that class.
1271 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1272 documentation.
1273 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1274 (@value{GDBP})
1275 @end smallexample
1276
1277 @item help @var{class}
1278 Using one of the general help classes as an argument, you can get a
1279 list of the individual commands in that class. For example, here is the
1280 help display for the class @code{status}:
1281
1282 @smallexample
1283 (@value{GDBP}) help status
1284 Status inquiries.
1285
1286 List of commands:
1287
1288 @c Line break in "show" line falsifies real output, but needed
1289 @c to fit in smallbook page size.
1290 show -- Generic command for showing things set
1291 with "set"
1292 info -- Generic command for printing status
1293
1294 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1295 documentation.
1296 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1297 (@value{GDBP})
1298 @end smallexample
1299
1300 @item help @var{command}
1301 With a command name as @code{help} argument, @value{GDBN} will display a
1302 short paragraph on how to use that command.
1303 @end table
1304
1305 In addition to @code{help}, you can use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{info}
1306 and @code{show} to inquire about the state of your program, or the state
1307 of @value{GDBN} itself. Each command supports many topics of inquiry; this
1308 manual introduces each of them in the appropriate context. The listings
1309 under @code{info} and under @code{show} in the Index point to
1310 all the sub-commands. @xref{Index}.
1311
1312 @c @group
1313 @table @code
1314 @item info
1315 @kindex info
1316 @kindex i
1317 This command (abbreviated @code{i}) is for describing the state of your
1318 program. For example, you can list the arguments given to your program
1319 with @code{info args}, list the registers currently in use with @code{info
1320 registers}, or list the breakpoints you have set with @code{info breakpoints}.
1321 You can get a complete list of the @code{info} sub-commands with
1322 @w{@code{help info}}.
1323
1324 @kindex show
1325 @item show
1326 In contrast, @code{show} is for describing the state of @value{GDBN} itself.
1327 You can change most of the things you can @code{show}, by using the
1328 related command @code{set}; for example, you can control what number
1329 system is used for displays with @code{set radix}, or simply inquire
1330 which is currently in use with @code{show radix}.
1331
1332 @kindex info set
1333 To display all the settable parameters and their current
1334 values, you can use @code{show} with no arguments; you may also use
1335 @code{info set}. Both commands produce the same display.
1336 @c FIXME: "info set" violates the rule that "info" is for state of
1337 @c FIXME...program. Ck w/ GNU: "info set" to be called something else,
1338 @c FIXME...or change desc of rule---eg "state of prog and debugging session"?
1339 @end table
1340 @c @end group
1341
1342 Here are three miscellaneous @code{show} subcommands, all of which are
1343 exceptional in lacking corresponding @code{set} commands:
1344
1345 @table @code
1346 @kindex show version
1347 @cindex version number
1348 @item show version
1349 Show what version of @value{GDBN} is running. You should include this
1350 information in @value{GDBN} bug-reports. If multiple versions of @value{GDBN} are in
1351 use at your site, you may occasionally want to determine which version
1352 of @value{GDBN} you are running; as @value{GDBN} evolves, new commands are introduced,
1353 and old ones may wither away. The version number is also announced
1354 when you start @value{GDBN}.
1355
1356 @kindex show copying
1357 @item show copying
1358 Display information about permission for copying @value{GDBN}.
1359
1360 @kindex show warranty
1361 @item show warranty
1362 Display the GNU ``NO WARRANTY'' statement.
1363 @end table
1364
1365 @node Running
1366 @chapter Running Programs Under @value{GDBN}
1367
1368 When you run a program under @value{GDBN}, you must first generate
1369 debugging information when you compile it.
1370 @ifclear BARETARGET
1371 You may start it with its arguments, if any, in an environment of your
1372 choice. You may redirect your program's input and output, debug an
1373 already running process, or kill a child process.
1374 @end ifclear
1375
1376 @menu
1377 * Compilation:: Compiling for debugging
1378 * Starting:: Starting your program
1379 @ifclear BARETARGET
1380 * Arguments:: Your program's arguments
1381 * Environment:: Your program's environment
1382 * Working Directory:: Your program's working directory
1383 * Input/Output:: Your program's input and output
1384 * Attach:: Debugging an already-running process
1385 * Kill Process:: Killing the child process
1386 * Process Information:: Additional process information
1387 * Threads:: Debugging programs with multiple threads
1388 @end ifclear
1389 @end menu
1390
1391 @node Compilation
1392 @section Compiling for debugging
1393
1394 In order to debug a program effectively, you need to generate
1395 debugging information when you compile it. This debugging information
1396 is stored in the object file; it describes the data type of each
1397 variable or function and the correspondence between source line numbers
1398 and addresses in the executable code.
1399
1400 To request debugging information, specify the @samp{-g} option when you run
1401 the compiler.
1402
1403 Many C compilers are unable to handle the @samp{-g} and @samp{-O}
1404 options together. Using those compilers, you cannot generate optimized
1405 executables containing debugging information.
1406
1407 @value{NGCC}, the GNU C compiler, supports @samp{-g} with or without
1408 @samp{-O}, making it possible to debug optimized code. We recommend
1409 that you @emph{always} use @samp{-g} whenever you compile a program.
1410 You may think your program is correct, but there is no sense in pushing
1411 your luck.
1412
1413 @cindex optimized code, debugging
1414 @cindex debugging optimized code
1415 When you debug a program compiled with @samp{-g -O}, remember that the
1416 optimizer is rearranging your code; the debugger will show you what is
1417 really there. Do not be too surprised when the execution path does not
1418 exactly match your source file! An extreme example: if you define a
1419 variable, but never use it, @value{GDBN} will never see that
1420 variable---because the compiler optimizes it out of existence.
1421
1422 Some things do not work as well with @samp{-g -O} as with just
1423 @samp{-g}, particularly on machines with instruction scheduling. If in
1424 doubt, recompile with @samp{-g} alone, and if this fixes the problem,
1425 please report it as a bug (including a test case!).
1426
1427 Older versions of the GNU C compiler permitted a variant option
1428 @w{@samp{-gg}} for debugging information. @value{GDBN} no longer supports this
1429 format; if your GNU C compiler has this option, do not use it.
1430
1431 @need 2000
1432 @node Starting
1433 @section Starting your program
1434 @cindex starting
1435 @cindex running
1436
1437 @table @code
1438 @item run
1439 @itemx r
1440 @kindex run
1441 Use the @code{run} command to start your program under @value{GDBN}. You must
1442 first specify the program name
1443 @ifset VXWORKS
1444 (except on VxWorks)
1445 @end ifset
1446 with an argument to @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Invocation, ,Getting In and
1447 Out of @value{GDBN}}), or by using the @code{file} or @code{exec-file}
1448 command (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
1449
1450 @end table
1451
1452 @ifclear BARETARGET
1453 If you are running your program in an execution environment that
1454 supports processes, @code{run} creates an inferior process and makes
1455 that process run your program. (In environments without processes,
1456 @code{run} jumps to the start of your program.)
1457
1458 The execution of a program is affected by certain information it
1459 receives from its superior. @value{GDBN} provides ways to specify this
1460 information, which you must do @emph{before} starting your program. (You
1461 can change it after starting your program, but such changes will only affect
1462 your program the next time you start it.) This information may be
1463 divided into four categories:
1464
1465 @table @asis
1466 @item The @emph{arguments.}
1467 Specify the arguments to give your program as the arguments of the
1468 @code{run} command. If a shell is available on your target, the shell
1469 is used to pass the arguments, so that you may use normal conventions
1470 (such as wildcard expansion or variable substitution) in describing
1471 the arguments. In Unix systems, you can control which shell is used
1472 with the @code{SHELL} environment variable. @xref{Arguments, ,Your
1473 program's arguments}.
1474
1475 @item The @emph{environment.}
1476 Your program normally inherits its environment from @value{GDBN}, but you can
1477 use the @value{GDBN} commands @code{set environment} and @code{unset
1478 environment} to change parts of the environment that will be given to
1479 your program. @xref{Environment, ,Your program's environment}.
1480
1481 @item The @emph{working directory.}
1482 Your program inherits its working directory from @value{GDBN}. You can set
1483 the @value{GDBN} working directory with the @code{cd} command in @value{GDBN}.
1484 @xref{Working Directory, ,Your program's working directory}.
1485
1486 @item The @emph{standard input and output.}
1487 Your program normally uses the same device for standard input and
1488 standard output as @value{GDBN} is using. You can redirect input and output
1489 in the @code{run} command line, or you can use the @code{tty} command to
1490 set a different device for your program.
1491 @xref{Input/Output, ,Your program's input and output}.
1492
1493 @cindex pipes
1494 @emph{Warning:} While input and output redirection work, you cannot use
1495 pipes to pass the output of the program you are debugging to another
1496 program; if you attempt this, @value{GDBN} is likely to wind up debugging the
1497 wrong program.
1498 @end table
1499 @end ifclear
1500
1501 When you issue the @code{run} command, your program begins to execute
1502 immediately. @xref{Stopping, ,Stopping and continuing}, for discussion
1503 of how to arrange for your program to stop. Once your program has
1504 stopped, you may call functions in your program, using the @code{print}
1505 or @code{call} commands. @xref{Data, ,Examining Data}.
1506
1507 If the modification time of your symbol file has changed since the
1508 last time @value{GDBN} read its symbols, @value{GDBN} will discard its symbol table and
1509 re-read it. When it does this, @value{GDBN} tries to retain your current
1510 breakpoints.
1511
1512 @ifclear BARETARGET
1513 @node Arguments
1514 @section Your program's arguments
1515
1516 @cindex arguments (to your program)
1517 The arguments to your program can be specified by the arguments of the
1518 @code{run} command. They are passed to a shell, which expands wildcard
1519 characters and performs redirection of I/O, and thence to your program.
1520 Your @code{SHELL} environment variable (if it exists) specifies what
1521 shell @value{GDBN} if you do not define @code{SHELL}, @value{GDBN} uses
1522 @code{/bin/sh}.
1523
1524 @code{run} with no arguments uses the same arguments used by the previous
1525 @code{run}, or those set by the @code{set args} command.
1526
1527 @kindex set args
1528 @table @code
1529 @item set args
1530 Specify the arguments to be used the next time your program is run. If
1531 @code{set args} has no arguments, @code{run} will execute your program
1532 with no arguments. Once you have run your program with arguments,
1533 using @code{set args} before the next @code{run} is the only way to run
1534 it again without arguments.
1535
1536 @item show args
1537 @kindex show args
1538 Show the arguments to give your program when it is started.
1539 @end table
1540
1541 @node Environment
1542 @section Your program's environment
1543
1544 @cindex environment (of your program)
1545 The @dfn{environment} consists of a set of environment variables and
1546 their values. Environment variables conventionally record such things as
1547 your user name, your home directory, your terminal type, and your search
1548 path for programs to run. Usually you set up environment variables with
1549 the shell and they are inherited by all the other programs you run. When
1550 debugging, it can be useful to try running your program with a modified
1551 environment without having to start @value{GDBN} over again.
1552
1553 @table @code
1554 @item path @var{directory}
1555 @kindex path
1556 Add @var{directory} to the front of the @code{PATH} environment variable
1557 (the search path for executables), for both @value{GDBN} and your program.
1558 You may specify several directory names, separated by @samp{:} or
1559 whitespace. If @var{directory} is already in the path, it is moved to
1560 the front, so it will be searched sooner.
1561
1562 You can use the string @samp{$cwd} to refer to whatever is the current
1563 working directory at the time @value{GDBN} searches the path. If you
1564 use @samp{.} instead, it refers to the directory where you executed the
1565 @code{path} command. @value{GDBN} replaces @samp{.} in the
1566 @var{directory} argument (with the current path) before adding
1567 @var{directory} to the search path.
1568 @c 'path' is explicitly nonrepeatable, but RMS points out it is silly to
1569 @c document that, since repeating it would be a no-op.
1570
1571 @item show paths
1572 @kindex show paths
1573 Display the list of search paths for executables (the @code{PATH}
1574 environment variable).
1575
1576 @item show environment @r{[}@var{varname}@r{]}
1577 @kindex show environment
1578 Print the value of environment variable @var{varname} to be given to
1579 your program when it starts. If you do not supply @var{varname},
1580 print the names and values of all environment variables to be given to
1581 your program. You can abbreviate @code{environment} as @code{env}.
1582
1583 @item set environment @var{varname} @r{[}=@r{]} @var{value}
1584 @kindex set environment
1585 Set environment variable @var{varname} to @var{value}. The value
1586 changes for your program only, not for @value{GDBN} itself. @var{value} may
1587 be any string; the values of environment variables are just strings, and
1588 any interpretation is supplied by your program itself. The @var{value}
1589 parameter is optional; if it is eliminated, the variable is set to a
1590 null value.
1591 @c "any string" here does not include leading, trailing
1592 @c blanks. Gnu asks: does anyone care?
1593
1594 For example, this command:
1595
1596 @example
1597 set env USER = foo
1598 @end example
1599
1600 @noindent
1601 tells a Unix program, when subsequently run, that its user is named
1602 @samp{foo}. (The spaces around @samp{=} are used for clarity here; they
1603 are not actually required.)
1604
1605 @item unset environment @var{varname}
1606 @kindex unset environment
1607 Remove variable @var{varname} from the environment to be passed to your
1608 program. This is different from @samp{set env @var{varname} =};
1609 @code{unset environment} removes the variable from the environment,
1610 rather than assigning it an empty value.
1611 @end table
1612
1613 @emph{Warning:} @value{GDBN} runs your program using the shell indicated
1614 by your @code{SHELL} environment variable if it exists (or
1615 @code{/bin/sh} if not). If your @code{SHELL} variable names a shell
1616 that runs an initialization file---such as @file{.cshrc} for C-shell, or
1617 @file{.bashrc} for BASH---any variables you set in that file will affect
1618 your program. You may wish to move setting of environment variables to
1619 files that are only run when you sign on, such as @file{.login} or
1620 @file{.profile}.
1621
1622 @node Working Directory
1623 @section Your program's working directory
1624
1625 @cindex working directory (of your program)
1626 Each time you start your program with @code{run}, it inherits its
1627 working directory from the current working directory of @value{GDBN}.
1628 The @value{GDBN} working directory is initially whatever it inherited
1629 from its parent process (typically the shell), but you can specify a new
1630 working directory in @value{GDBN} with the @code{cd} command.
1631
1632 The @value{GDBN} working directory also serves as a default for the commands
1633 that specify files for @value{GDBN} to operate on. @xref{Files, ,Commands to
1634 specify files}.
1635
1636 @table @code
1637 @item cd @var{directory}
1638 @kindex cd
1639 Set the @value{GDBN} working directory to @var{directory}.
1640
1641 @item pwd
1642 @kindex pwd
1643 Print the @value{GDBN} working directory.
1644 @end table
1645
1646 @node Input/Output
1647 @section Your program's input and output
1648
1649 @cindex redirection
1650 @cindex i/o
1651 @cindex terminal
1652 By default, the program you run under @value{GDBN} does input and output to
1653 the same terminal that @value{GDBN} uses. @value{GDBN} switches the terminal to
1654 its own terminal modes to interact with you, but it records the terminal
1655 modes your program was using and switches back to them when you continue
1656 running your program.
1657
1658 @table @code
1659 @item info terminal
1660 @kindex info terminal
1661 Displays information recorded by @value{GDBN} about the terminal modes your
1662 program is using.
1663 @end table
1664
1665 You can redirect your program's input and/or output using shell
1666 redirection with the @code{run} command. For example,
1667
1668 @example
1669 run > outfile
1670 @end example
1671
1672 @noindent
1673 starts your program, diverting its output to the file @file{outfile}.
1674
1675 @kindex tty
1676 @cindex controlling terminal
1677 Another way to specify where your program should do input and output is
1678 with the @code{tty} command. This command accepts a file name as
1679 argument, and causes this file to be the default for future @code{run}
1680 commands. It also resets the controlling terminal for the child
1681 process, for future @code{run} commands. For example,
1682
1683 @example
1684 tty /dev/ttyb
1685 @end example
1686
1687 @noindent
1688 directs that processes started with subsequent @code{run} commands
1689 default to do input and output on the terminal @file{/dev/ttyb} and have
1690 that as their controlling terminal.
1691
1692 An explicit redirection in @code{run} overrides the @code{tty} command's
1693 effect on the input/output device, but not its effect on the controlling
1694 terminal.
1695
1696 When you use the @code{tty} command or redirect input in the @code{run}
1697 command, only the input @emph{for your program} is affected. The input
1698 for @value{GDBN} still comes from your terminal.
1699
1700 @node Attach
1701 @section Debugging an already-running process
1702 @kindex attach
1703 @cindex attach
1704
1705 @table @code
1706 @item attach @var{process-id}
1707 This command attaches to a running process---one that was started
1708 outside @value{GDBN}. (@code{info files} will show your active
1709 targets.) The command takes as argument a process ID. The usual way to
1710 find out the process-id of a Unix process is with the @code{ps} utility,
1711 or with the @samp{jobs -l} shell command.
1712
1713 @code{attach} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} a second time after
1714 executing the command.
1715 @end table
1716
1717 To use @code{attach}, your program must be running in an environment
1718 which supports processes; for example, @code{attach} does not work for
1719 programs on bare-board targets that lack an operating system. You must
1720 also have permission to send the process a signal.
1721
1722 When using @code{attach}, you should first use the @code{file} command
1723 to specify the program running in the process and load its symbol table.
1724 @xref{Files, ,Commands to Specify Files}.
1725
1726 The first thing @value{GDBN} does after arranging to debug the specified
1727 process is to stop it. You can examine and modify an attached process
1728 with all the @value{GDBN} commands that are ordinarily available when you start
1729 processes with @code{run}. You can insert breakpoints; you can step and
1730 continue; you can modify storage. If you would rather the process
1731 continue running, you may use the @code{continue} command after
1732 attaching @value{GDBN} to the process.
1733
1734 @table @code
1735 @item detach
1736 @kindex detach
1737 When you have finished debugging the attached process, you can use the
1738 @code{detach} command to release it from @value{GDBN} control. Detaching
1739 the process continues its execution. After the @code{detach} command,
1740 that process and @value{GDBN} become completely independent once more, and you
1741 are ready to @code{attach} another process or start one with @code{run}.
1742 @code{detach} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
1743 executing the command.
1744 @end table
1745
1746 If you exit @value{GDBN} or use the @code{run} command while you have an attached
1747 process, you kill that process. By default, you will be asked for
1748 confirmation if you try to do either of these things; you can control
1749 whether or not you need to confirm by using the @code{set confirm} command
1750 (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and messages}).
1751
1752 @node Kill Process
1753 @c @group
1754 @section Killing the child process
1755
1756 @table @code
1757 @item kill
1758 @kindex kill
1759 Kill the child process in which your program is running under @value{GDBN}.
1760 @end table
1761
1762 This command is useful if you wish to debug a core dump instead of a
1763 running process. @value{GDBN} ignores any core dump file while your program
1764 is running.
1765 @c @end group
1766
1767 On some operating systems, a program cannot be executed outside @value{GDBN}
1768 while you have breakpoints set on it inside @value{GDBN}. You can use the
1769 @code{kill} command in this situation to permit running your program
1770 outside the debugger.
1771
1772 The @code{kill} command is also useful if you wish to recompile and
1773 relink your program, since on many systems it is impossible to modify an
1774 executable file while it is running in a process. In this case, when you
1775 next type @code{run}, @value{GDBN} will notice that the file has changed, and
1776 will re-read the symbol table (while trying to preserve your current
1777 breakpoint settings).
1778
1779 @node Process Information
1780 @section Additional process information
1781
1782 @kindex /proc
1783 @cindex process image
1784 Some operating systems provide a facility called @samp{/proc} that can
1785 be used to examine the image of a running process using file-system
1786 subroutines. If @value{GDBN} is configured for an operating system with this
1787 facility, the command @code{info proc} is available to report on several
1788 kinds of information about the process running your program.
1789
1790 @table @code
1791 @item info proc
1792 @kindex info proc
1793 Summarize available information about the process.
1794
1795 @item info proc mappings
1796 @kindex info proc mappings
1797 Report on the address ranges accessible in the program, with information
1798 on whether your program may read, write, or execute each range.
1799
1800 @item info proc times
1801 @kindex info proc times
1802 Starting time, user CPU time, and system CPU time for your program and
1803 its children.
1804
1805 @item info proc id
1806 @kindex info proc id
1807 Report on the process IDs related to your program: its own process ID,
1808 the ID of its parent, the process group ID, and the session ID.
1809
1810 @item info proc status
1811 @kindex info proc status
1812 General information on the state of the process. If the process is
1813 stopped, this report includes the reason for stopping, and any signal
1814 received.
1815
1816 @item info proc all
1817 Show all the above information about the process.
1818 @end table
1819
1820 @node Threads
1821 @section Debugging programs with multiple threads
1822
1823 @cindex threads of execution
1824 @cindex multiple threads
1825 @cindex switching threads
1826 In some operating systems, a single program may have more than one
1827 @dfn{thread} of execution. The precise semantics of threads differ from
1828 one operating system to another, but in general the threads of a single
1829 program are akin to multiple processes---except that they share one
1830 address space (that is, they can all examine and modify the same
1831 variables). On the other hand, each thread has its own registers and
1832 execution stack, and perhaps private memory.
1833
1834 @value{GDBN} provides these facilities for debugging multi-thread
1835 programs:
1836
1837 @itemize @bullet
1838 @item automatic notification of new threads
1839 @item @samp{thread @var{threadno}}, a command to switch among threads
1840 @item @samp{info threads}, a command to inquire about existing threads
1841 @item thread-specific breakpoints
1842 @end itemize
1843
1844 @quotation
1845 @emph{Warning:} These facilities are not yet available on every
1846 @value{GDBN} configuration where the operating system supports threads.
1847 If your @value{GDBN} does not support threads, these commands have no
1848 effect. For example, a system without thread support shows no output
1849 from @samp{info threads}, and always rejects the @code{thread} command,
1850 like this:
1851
1852 @smallexample
1853 (@value{GDBP}) info threads
1854 (@value{GDBP}) thread 1
1855 Thread ID 1 not known. Use the "info threads" command to
1856 see the IDs of currently known threads.
1857 @end smallexample
1858 @c FIXME to implementors: how hard would it be to say "sorry, this GDB
1859 @c doesn't support threads"?
1860 @end quotation
1861
1862 @cindex focus of debugging
1863 @cindex current thread
1864 The @value{GDBN} thread debugging facility allows you to observe all
1865 threads while your program runs---but whenever @value{GDBN} takes
1866 control, one thread in particular is always the focus of debugging.
1867 This thread is called the @dfn{current thread}. Debugging commands show
1868 program information from the perspective of the current thread.
1869
1870 @kindex New @var{systag}
1871 @cindex thread identifier (system)
1872 @c FIXME-implementors!! It would be more helpful if the [New...] message
1873 @c included GDB's numeric thread handle, so you could just go to that
1874 @c thread without first checking `info threads'.
1875 Whenever @value{GDBN} detects a new thread in your program, it displays
1876 the target system's identification for the thread with a message in the
1877 form @samp{[New @var{systag}]}. @var{systag} is a thread identifier
1878 whose form varies depending on the particular system. For example, on
1879 LynxOS, you might see
1880
1881 @example
1882 [New process 35 thread 27]
1883 @end example
1884
1885 @noindent
1886 when @value{GDBN} notices a new thread. In contrast, on an SGI system,
1887 the @var{systag} is simply something like @samp{process 368}, with no
1888 further qualifier.
1889
1890 @c FIXME!! (1) Does the [New...] message appear even for the very first
1891 @c thread of a program, or does it only appear for the
1892 @c second---i.e., when it becomes obvious we have a multithread
1893 @c program?
1894 @c (2) *Is* there necessarily a first thread always? Or do some
1895 @c multithread systems permit starting a program with multiple
1896 @c threads ab initio?
1897
1898 @cindex thread number
1899 @cindex thread identifier (GDB)
1900 For debugging purposes, @value{GDBN} associates its own thread
1901 number---always a single integer---with each thread in your program.
1902
1903 @table @code
1904 @item info threads
1905 @kindex info threads
1906 Display a summary of all threads currently in your
1907 program. @value{GDBN} displays for each thread (in this order):
1908
1909 @enumerate
1910 @item the thread number assigned by @value{GDBN}
1911
1912 @item the target system's thread identifier (@var{systag})
1913
1914 @item the current stack frame summary for that thread
1915 @end enumerate
1916
1917 @noindent
1918 An asterisk @samp{*} to the left of the @value{GDBN} thread number
1919 indicates the current thread.
1920
1921 For example,
1922 @end table
1923 @c end table here to get a little more width for example
1924
1925 @smallexample
1926 (@value{GDBP}) info threads
1927 3 process 35 thread 27 0x34e5 in sigpause ()
1928 2 process 35 thread 23 0x34e5 in sigpause ()
1929 * 1 process 35 thread 13 main (argc=1, argv=0x7ffffff8)
1930 at threadtest.c:68
1931 @end smallexample
1932
1933 @table @code
1934 @item thread @var{threadno}
1935 @kindex thread @var{threadno}
1936 Make thread number @var{threadno} the current thread. The command
1937 argument @var{threadno} is the internal @value{GDBN} thread number, as
1938 shown in the first field of the @samp{info threads} display.
1939 @value{GDBN} responds by displaying the system identifier of the thread
1940 you selected, and its current stack frame summary:
1941
1942 @smallexample
1943 @c FIXME!! This example made up; find a GDB w/threads and get real one
1944 (@value{GDBP}) thread 2
1945 [Switching to process 35 thread 23]
1946 0x34e5 in sigpause ()
1947 @end smallexample
1948
1949 @noindent
1950 As with the @samp{[New @dots{}]} message, the form of the text after
1951 @samp{Switching to} depends on your system's conventions for identifying
1952 threads.
1953 @end table
1954
1955 @cindex automatic thread selection
1956 @cindex switching threads automatically
1957 @cindex threads, automatic switching
1958 Whenever @value{GDBN} stops your program, due to a breakpoint or a
1959 signal, it automatically selects the thread where that breakpoint or
1960 signal happened. @value{GDBN} alerts you to the context switch with a
1961 message of the form @samp{[Switching to @var{systag}]} to identify the
1962 thread.
1963
1964 @xref{Thread Stops,,Stopping and starting multi-thread programs}, for
1965 more information about how @value{GDBN} behaves when you stop and start
1966 programs with multiple threads.
1967
1968 @xref{Set Watchpoints,,Setting watchpoints}, for information about
1969 watchpoints in programs with multiple threads.
1970 @end ifclear
1971
1972 @node Stopping
1973 @chapter Stopping and Continuing
1974
1975 The principal purposes of using a debugger are so that you can stop your
1976 program before it terminates; or so that, if your program runs into
1977 trouble, you can investigate and find out why.
1978
1979 Inside @value{GDBN}, your program may stop for any of several reasons, such
1980 as
1981 @ifclear BARETARGET
1982 a signal,
1983 @end ifclear
1984 a breakpoint, or reaching a new line after a @value{GDBN}
1985 command such as @code{step}. You may then examine and change
1986 variables, set new breakpoints or remove old ones, and then continue
1987 execution. Usually, the messages shown by @value{GDBN} provide ample
1988 explanation of the status of your program---but you can also explicitly
1989 request this information at any time.
1990
1991 @table @code
1992 @item info program
1993 @kindex info program
1994 Display information about the status of your program: whether it is
1995 running or not,
1996 @ifclear BARETARGET
1997 what process it is,
1998 @end ifclear
1999 and why it stopped.
2000 @end table
2001
2002 @menu
2003 @ifclear CONLY
2004 * Breakpoints:: Breakpoints, watchpoints, and exceptions
2005 @end ifclear
2006 @ifset CONLY
2007 * Breakpoints:: Breakpoints and watchpoints
2008 @end ifset
2009 @c Remnant makeinfo bug requires blank line after *successful* end-if in menu:
2010
2011 * Continuing and Stepping:: Resuming execution
2012 @ifset POSIX
2013 * Signals:: Signals
2014 @end ifset
2015 @ifclear BARETARGET
2016 * Thread Stops:: Stopping and starting multi-thread programs
2017 @end ifclear
2018 @end menu
2019
2020 @c makeinfo node-defaulting requires adjacency of @node and sectioning cmds
2021 @c ...hence distribute @node Breakpoints over two possible @if expansions.
2022 @c
2023 @ifclear CONLY
2024 @node Breakpoints
2025 @section Breakpoints, watchpoints, and exceptions
2026 @end ifclear
2027 @ifset CONLY
2028 @node Breakpoints
2029 @section Breakpoints and watchpoints
2030 @end ifset
2031
2032 @cindex breakpoints
2033 A @dfn{breakpoint} makes your program stop whenever a certain point in
2034 the program is reached. For each breakpoint, you can add various
2035 conditions to control in finer detail whether your program will stop.
2036 You can set breakpoints with the @code{break} command and its variants
2037 (@pxref{Set Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}), to specify the place where
2038 your program should stop by line number, function name or exact address
2039 in the program.
2040 @ifclear CONLY
2041 In languages with exception handling (such as GNU C++), you can also set
2042 breakpoints where an exception is raised (@pxref{Exception Handling,,
2043 Breakpoints and exceptions}).
2044 @end ifclear
2045
2046 @cindex watchpoints
2047 @cindex memory tracing
2048 @cindex breakpoint on memory address
2049 @cindex breakpoint on variable modification
2050 A @dfn{watchpoint} is a special breakpoint that stops your program
2051 when the value of an expression changes. You must use a different
2052 command to set watchpoints (@pxref{Set Watchpoints, ,Setting
2053 watchpoints}), but aside from that, you can manage a watchpoint like
2054 any other breakpoint: you enable, disable, and delete both breakpoints
2055 and watchpoints using the same commands.
2056
2057 You can arrange to have values from your program displayed automatically
2058 whenever @value{GDBN} stops at a breakpoint. @xref{Auto Display,,
2059 Automatic display}.
2060
2061 @cindex breakpoint numbers
2062 @cindex numbers for breakpoints
2063 @value{GDBN} assigns a number to each breakpoint or watchpoint when you
2064 create it; these numbers are successive integers starting with one. In
2065 many of the commands for controlling various features of breakpoints you
2066 use the breakpoint number to say which breakpoint you want to change.
2067 Each breakpoint may be @dfn{enabled} or @dfn{disabled}; if disabled, it has
2068 no effect on your program until you enable it again.
2069
2070 @menu
2071 * Set Breaks:: Setting breakpoints
2072 * Set Watchpoints:: Setting watchpoints
2073 @ifclear CONLY
2074 * Exception Handling:: Breakpoints and exceptions
2075 @end ifclear
2076
2077 * Delete Breaks:: Deleting breakpoints
2078 * Disabling:: Disabling breakpoints
2079 * Conditions:: Break conditions
2080 * Break Commands:: Breakpoint command lists
2081 @ifclear CONLY
2082 * Breakpoint Menus:: Breakpoint menus
2083 @end ifclear
2084 @ifclear BARETARGET
2085 * Error in Breakpoints:: ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
2086 @end ifclear
2087 @end menu
2088
2089 @node Set Breaks
2090 @subsection Setting breakpoints
2091
2092 @c FIXME LMB what does GDB do if no code on line of breakpt?
2093 @c consider in particular declaration with/without initialization.
2094 @c
2095 @c FIXME 2 is there stuff on this already? break at fun start, already init?
2096
2097 @kindex break
2098 @kindex b
2099 @kindex $bpnum
2100 @cindex latest breakpoint
2101 Breakpoints are set with the @code{break} command (abbreviated
2102 @code{b}). The debugger convenience variable @samp{$bpnum} records the
2103 number of the beakpoint you've set most recently; see @ref{Convenience
2104 Vars,, Convenience variables}, for a discussion of what you can do with
2105 convenience variables.
2106
2107 You have several ways to say where the breakpoint should go.
2108
2109 @table @code
2110 @item break @var{function}
2111 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function}.
2112 @ifclear CONLY
2113 When using source languages that permit overloading of symbols, such as
2114 C++, @var{function} may refer to more than one possible place to break.
2115 @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}, for a discussion of that situation.
2116 @end ifclear
2117
2118 @item break +@var{offset}
2119 @itemx break -@var{offset}
2120 Set a breakpoint some number of lines forward or back from the position
2121 at which execution stopped in the currently selected frame.
2122
2123 @item break @var{linenum}
2124 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in the current source file.
2125 That file is the last file whose source text was printed. This
2126 breakpoint will stop your program just before it executes any of the
2127 code on that line.
2128
2129 @item break @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
2130 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in source file @var{filename}.
2131
2132 @item break @var{filename}:@var{function}
2133 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function} found in file
2134 @var{filename}. Specifying a file name as well as a function name is
2135 superfluous except when multiple files contain similarly named
2136 functions.
2137
2138 @item break *@var{address}
2139 Set a breakpoint at address @var{address}. You can use this to set
2140 breakpoints in parts of your program which do not have debugging
2141 information or source files.
2142
2143 @item break
2144 When called without any arguments, @code{break} sets a breakpoint at
2145 the next instruction to be executed in the selected stack frame
2146 (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the Stack}). In any selected frame but the
2147 innermost, this will cause your program to stop as soon as control
2148 returns to that frame. This is similar to the effect of a
2149 @code{finish} command in the frame inside the selected frame---except
2150 that @code{finish} does not leave an active breakpoint. If you use
2151 @code{break} without an argument in the innermost frame, @value{GDBN} will stop
2152 the next time it reaches the current location; this may be useful
2153 inside loops.
2154
2155 @value{GDBN} normally ignores breakpoints when it resumes execution, until at
2156 least one instruction has been executed. If it did not do this, you
2157 would be unable to proceed past a breakpoint without first disabling the
2158 breakpoint. This rule applies whether or not the breakpoint already
2159 existed when your program stopped.
2160
2161 @item break @dots{} if @var{cond}
2162 Set a breakpoint with condition @var{cond}; evaluate the expression
2163 @var{cond} each time the breakpoint is reached, and stop only if the
2164 value is nonzero---that is, if @var{cond} evaluates as true.
2165 @samp{@dots{}} stands for one of the possible arguments described
2166 above (or no argument) specifying where to break. @xref{Conditions,
2167 ,Break conditions}, for more information on breakpoint conditions.
2168
2169 @item tbreak @var{args}
2170 @kindex tbreak
2171 Set a breakpoint enabled only for one stop. @var{args} are the
2172 same as for the @code{break} command, and the breakpoint is set in the same
2173 way, but the breakpoint is automatically disabled after the first time your
2174 program stops there. @xref{Disabling, ,Disabling breakpoints}.
2175
2176 @item rbreak @var{regex}
2177 @kindex rbreak
2178 @cindex regular expression
2179 @c FIXME what kind of regexp?
2180 Set breakpoints on all functions matching the regular expression
2181 @var{regex}. This command
2182 sets an unconditional breakpoint on all matches, printing a list of all
2183 breakpoints it set. Once these breakpoints are set, they are treated
2184 just like the breakpoints set with the @code{break} command. You can
2185 delete them, disable them, or make them conditional the same way as any
2186 other breakpoint.
2187
2188 @ifclear CONLY
2189 When debugging C++ programs, @code{rbreak} is useful for setting
2190 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
2191 classes.
2192 @end ifclear
2193
2194 @kindex info breakpoints
2195 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info breakpoints}
2196 @item info breakpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2197 @itemx info break @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2198 @itemx info watchpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2199 Print a table of all breakpoints and watchpoints set and not
2200 deleted, with the following columns for each breakpoint:
2201
2202 @table @emph
2203 @item Breakpoint Numbers
2204 @item Type
2205 Breakpoint or watchpoint.
2206 @item Disposition
2207 Whether the breakpoint is marked to be disabled or deleted when hit.
2208 @item Enabled or Disabled
2209 Enabled breakpoints are marked with @samp{y}. @samp{n} marks breakpoints
2210 that are not enabled.
2211 @item Address
2212 Where the breakpoint is in your program, as a memory address
2213 @item What
2214 Where the breakpoint is in the source for your program, as a file and
2215 line number.
2216 @end table
2217
2218 @noindent
2219 If a breakpoint is conditional, @code{info break} shows the condition on
2220 the line following the affected breakpoint; breakpoint commands, if any,
2221 are listed after that.
2222
2223 @noindent
2224 @code{info break} with a breakpoint
2225 number @var{n} as argument lists only that breakpoint. The
2226 convenience variable @code{$_} and the default examining-address for
2227 the @code{x} command are set to the address of the last breakpoint
2228 listed (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}).
2229 @end table
2230
2231 @value{GDBN} allows you to set any number of breakpoints at the same place in
2232 your program. There is nothing silly or meaningless about this. When
2233 the breakpoints are conditional, this is even useful
2234 (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}).
2235
2236 @cindex negative breakpoint numbers
2237 @cindex internal @value{GDBN} breakpoints
2238 @value{GDBN} itself sometimes sets breakpoints in your program for special
2239 purposes, such as proper handling of @code{longjmp} (in C programs).
2240 These internal breakpoints are assigned negative numbers, starting with
2241 @code{-1}; @samp{info breakpoints} does not display them.
2242
2243 You can see these breakpoints with the @value{GDBN} maintenance command
2244 @samp{maint info breakpoints}.
2245
2246 @table @code
2247 @kindex maint info breakpoints
2248 @item maint info breakpoints
2249 Using the same format as @samp{info breakpoints}, display both the
2250 breakpoints you've set explicitly, and those @value{GDBN} is using for
2251 internal purposes. Internal breakpoints are shown with negative
2252 breakpoint numbers. The type column identifies what kind of breakpoint
2253 is shown:
2254
2255 @table @code
2256 @item breakpoint
2257 Normal, explicitly set breakpoint.
2258
2259 @item watchpoint
2260 Normal, explicitly set watchpoint.
2261
2262 @item longjmp
2263 Internal breakpoint, used to handle correctly stepping through
2264 @code{longjmp} calls.
2265
2266 @item longjmp resume
2267 Internal breakpoint at the target of a @code{longjmp}.
2268
2269 @item until
2270 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{until} command.
2271
2272 @item finish
2273 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{finish} command.
2274 @end table
2275
2276 @end table
2277
2278
2279 @node Set Watchpoints
2280 @subsection Setting watchpoints
2281 @cindex setting watchpoints
2282
2283 You can use a watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an
2284 expression changes, without having to predict a particular place
2285 where this may happen.
2286
2287 Watchpoints currently execute two orders of magnitude more slowly than
2288 other breakpoints, but this can be well worth it to catch errors where
2289 you have no clue what part of your program is the culprit. Some
2290 processors provide special hardware to support watchpoint evaluation; future
2291 releases of @value{GDBN} will use such hardware if it is available.
2292
2293 @table @code
2294 @kindex watch
2295 @item watch @var{expr}
2296 Set a watchpoint for an expression.
2297
2298 @kindex info watchpoints
2299 @item info watchpoints
2300 This command prints a list of watchpoints and breakpoints; it is the
2301 same as @code{info break}.
2302 @end table
2303
2304 @ifclear BARETARGET
2305 @quotation
2306 @cindex watchpoints and threads
2307 @cindex threads and watchpoints
2308 @emph{Warning:} in multi-thread programs, watchpoints have only limited
2309 usefulness. With the current watchpoint implementation, @value{GDBN}
2310 can only watch the value of an expression @emph{in a single thread}. If
2311 you are confident that the expression can only change due to the current
2312 thread's activity (and if you are also confident that the same thread
2313 will remain current), then you can use watchpoints as usual. However,
2314 @value{GDBN} may not notice when a non-current thread's activity changes
2315 the expression.
2316 @end quotation
2317 @end ifclear
2318
2319 @ifclear CONLY
2320 @node Exception Handling
2321 @subsection Breakpoints and exceptions
2322 @cindex exception handlers
2323
2324 Some languages, such as GNU C++, implement exception handling. You can
2325 use @value{GDBN} to examine what caused your program to raise an exception,
2326 and to list the exceptions your program is prepared to handle at a
2327 given point in time.
2328
2329 @table @code
2330 @item catch @var{exceptions}
2331 @kindex catch
2332 You can set breakpoints at active exception handlers by using the
2333 @code{catch} command. @var{exceptions} is a list of names of exceptions
2334 to catch.
2335 @end table
2336
2337 You can use @code{info catch} to list active exception handlers.
2338 @xref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}.
2339
2340 There are currently some limitations to exception handling in @value{GDBN}.
2341 These will be corrected in a future release.
2342
2343 @itemize @bullet
2344 @item
2345 If you call a function interactively, @value{GDBN} normally returns
2346 control to you when the function has finished executing. If the call
2347 raises an exception, however, the call may bypass the mechanism that
2348 returns control to you and cause your program to simply continue
2349 running until it hits a breakpoint, catches a signal that @value{GDBN} is
2350 listening for, or exits.
2351 @item
2352 You cannot raise an exception interactively.
2353 @item
2354 You cannot interactively install an exception handler.
2355 @end itemize
2356
2357 @cindex raise exceptions
2358 Sometimes @code{catch} is not the best way to debug exception handling:
2359 if you need to know exactly where an exception is raised, it is better to
2360 stop @emph{before} the exception handler is called, since that way you
2361 can see the stack before any unwinding takes place. If you set a
2362 breakpoint in an exception handler instead, it may not be easy to find
2363 out where the exception was raised.
2364
2365 To stop just before an exception handler is called, you need some
2366 knowledge of the implementation. In the case of GNU C++, exceptions are
2367 raised by calling a library function named @code{__raise_exception}
2368 which has the following ANSI C interface:
2369
2370 @example
2371 /* @var{addr} is where the exception identifier is stored.
2372 ID is the exception identifier. */
2373 void __raise_exception (void **@var{addr}, void *@var{id});
2374 @end example
2375
2376 @noindent
2377 To make the debugger catch all exceptions before any stack
2378 unwinding takes place, set a breakpoint on @code{__raise_exception}
2379 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; watchpoints; and exceptions}).
2380
2381 With a conditional breakpoint (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions})
2382 that depends on the value of @var{id}, you can stop your program when
2383 a specific exception is raised. You can use multiple conditional
2384 breakpoints to stop your program when any of a number of exceptions are
2385 raised.
2386 @end ifclear
2387
2388 @node Delete Breaks
2389 @subsection Deleting breakpoints
2390
2391 @cindex clearing breakpoints, watchpoints
2392 @cindex deleting breakpoints, watchpoints
2393 It is often necessary to eliminate a breakpoint or watchpoint once it
2394 has done its job and you no longer want your program to stop there. This
2395 is called @dfn{deleting} the breakpoint. A breakpoint that has been
2396 deleted no longer exists; it is forgotten.
2397
2398 With the @code{clear} command you can delete breakpoints according to
2399 where they are in your program. With the @code{delete} command you can
2400 delete individual breakpoints or watchpoints by specifying their
2401 breakpoint numbers.
2402
2403 It is not necessary to delete a breakpoint to proceed past it. @value{GDBN}
2404 automatically ignores breakpoints on the first instruction to be executed
2405 when you continue execution without changing the execution address.
2406
2407 @table @code
2408 @item clear
2409 @kindex clear
2410 Delete any breakpoints at the next instruction to be executed in the
2411 selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}). When
2412 the innermost frame is selected, this is a good way to delete a
2413 breakpoint where your program just stopped.
2414
2415 @item clear @var{function}
2416 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{function}
2417 Delete any breakpoints set at entry to the function @var{function}.
2418
2419 @item clear @var{linenum}
2420 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
2421 Delete any breakpoints set at or within the code of the specified line.
2422
2423 @item delete @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2424 @cindex delete breakpoints
2425 @kindex delete
2426 @kindex d
2427 Delete the breakpoints or watchpoints of the numbers specified as
2428 arguments. If no argument is specified, delete all breakpoints (@value{GDBN}
2429 asks confirmation, unless you have @code{set confirm off}). You
2430 can abbreviate this command as @code{d}.
2431 @end table
2432
2433 @node Disabling
2434 @subsection Disabling breakpoints
2435
2436 @cindex disabled breakpoints
2437 @cindex enabled breakpoints
2438 Rather than deleting a breakpoint or watchpoint, you might prefer to
2439 @dfn{disable} it. This makes the breakpoint inoperative as if it had
2440 been deleted, but remembers the information on the breakpoint so that
2441 you can @dfn{enable} it again later.
2442
2443 You disable and enable breakpoints and watchpoints with the
2444 @code{enable} and @code{disable} commands, optionally specifying one or
2445 more breakpoint numbers as arguments. Use @code{info break} or
2446 @code{info watch} to print a list of breakpoints or watchpoints if you
2447 do not know which numbers to use.
2448
2449 A breakpoint or watchpoint can have any of four different states of
2450 enablement:
2451
2452 @itemize @bullet
2453 @item
2454 Enabled. The breakpoint will stop your program. A breakpoint set
2455 with the @code{break} command starts out in this state.
2456 @item
2457 Disabled. The breakpoint has no effect on your program.
2458 @item
2459 Enabled once. The breakpoint will stop your program, but
2460 when it does so it will become disabled. A breakpoint set
2461 with the @code{tbreak} command starts out in this state.
2462 @item
2463 Enabled for deletion. The breakpoint will stop your program, but
2464 immediately after it does so it will be deleted permanently.
2465 @end itemize
2466
2467 You can use the following commands to enable or disable breakpoints and
2468 watchpoints:
2469
2470 @table @code
2471 @item disable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2472 @kindex disable breakpoints
2473 @kindex disable
2474 @kindex dis
2475 Disable the specified breakpoints---or all breakpoints, if none are
2476 listed. A disabled breakpoint has no effect but is not forgotten. All
2477 options such as ignore-counts, conditions and commands are remembered in
2478 case the breakpoint is enabled again later. You may abbreviate
2479 @code{disable} as @code{dis}.
2480
2481 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2482 @kindex enable breakpoints
2483 @kindex enable
2484 Enable the specified breakpoints (or all defined breakpoints). They
2485 become effective once again in stopping your program.
2486
2487 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} once @var{bnums}@dots{}
2488 Enable the specified breakpoints temporarily. Each will be disabled
2489 again the next time it stops your program.
2490
2491 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} delete @var{bnums}@dots{}
2492 Enable the specified breakpoints to work once and then die. Each of
2493 the breakpoints will be deleted the next time it stops your program.
2494 @end table
2495
2496 Save for a breakpoint set with @code{tbreak} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
2497 ,Setting breakpoints}), breakpoints that you set are initially enabled;
2498 subsequently, they become disabled or enabled only when you use one of
2499 the commands above. (The command @code{until} can set and delete a
2500 breakpoint of its own, but it will not change the state of your other
2501 breakpoints; see @ref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and
2502 stepping}.)
2503
2504 @node Conditions
2505 @subsection Break conditions
2506 @cindex conditional breakpoints
2507 @cindex breakpoint conditions
2508
2509 @c FIXME what is scope of break condition expr? Context where wanted?
2510 @c in particular for a watchpoint?
2511 The simplest sort of breakpoint breaks every time your program reaches a
2512 specified place. You can also specify a @dfn{condition} for a
2513 breakpoint. A condition is just a Boolean expression in your
2514 programming language (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). A breakpoint with
2515 a condition evaluates the expression each time your program reaches it,
2516 and your program stops only if the condition is @emph{true}.
2517
2518 This is the converse of using assertions for program validation; in that
2519 situation, you want to stop when the assertion is violated---that is,
2520 when the condition is false. In C, if you want to test an assertion expressed
2521 by the condition @var{assert}, you should set the condition
2522 @samp{! @var{assert}} on the appropriate breakpoint.
2523
2524 Conditions are also accepted for watchpoints; you may not need them,
2525 since a watchpoint is inspecting the value of an expression anyhow---but
2526 it might be simpler, say, to just set a watchpoint on a variable name,
2527 and specify a condition that tests whether the new value is an interesting
2528 one.
2529
2530 Break conditions can have side effects, and may even call functions in
2531 your program. This can be useful, for example, to activate functions
2532 that log program progress, or to use your own print functions to
2533 format special data structures. The effects are completely predictable
2534 unless there is another enabled breakpoint at the same address. (In
2535 that case, @value{GDBN} might see the other breakpoint first and stop your
2536 program without checking the condition of this one.) Note that
2537 breakpoint commands are usually more convenient and flexible for the
2538 purpose of performing side effects when a breakpoint is reached
2539 (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint command lists}).
2540
2541 Break conditions can be specified when a breakpoint is set, by using
2542 @samp{if} in the arguments to the @code{break} command. @xref{Set
2543 Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}. They can also be changed at any time
2544 with the @code{condition} command. The @code{watch} command does not
2545 recognize the @code{if} keyword; @code{condition} is the only way to
2546 impose a further condition on a watchpoint.
2547
2548 @table @code
2549 @item condition @var{bnum} @var{expression}
2550 @kindex condition
2551 Specify @var{expression} as the break condition for breakpoint or
2552 watchpoint number @var{bnum}. From now on, this breakpoint will stop
2553 your program only if the value of @var{expression} is true (nonzero, in
2554 C). When you use @code{condition}, @value{GDBN} checks @var{expression}
2555 immediately for syntactic correctness, and to determine whether symbols
2556 in it have referents in the context of your breakpoint.
2557 @c FIXME so what does GDB do if there is no referent? Moreover, what
2558 @c about watchpoints?
2559 @value{GDBN} does
2560 not actually evaluate @var{expression} at the time the @code{condition}
2561 command is given, however. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
2562
2563 @item condition @var{bnum}
2564 Remove the condition from breakpoint number @var{bnum}. It becomes
2565 an ordinary unconditional breakpoint.
2566 @end table
2567
2568 @cindex ignore count (of breakpoint)
2569 A special case of a breakpoint condition is to stop only when the
2570 breakpoint has been reached a certain number of times. This is so
2571 useful that there is a special way to do it, using the @dfn{ignore
2572 count} of the breakpoint. Every breakpoint has an ignore count, which
2573 is an integer. Most of the time, the ignore count is zero, and
2574 therefore has no effect. But if your program reaches a breakpoint whose
2575 ignore count is positive, then instead of stopping, it just decrements
2576 the ignore count by one and continues. As a result, if the ignore count
2577 value is @var{n}, the breakpoint will not stop the next @var{n} times it
2578 is reached.
2579
2580 @table @code
2581 @item ignore @var{bnum} @var{count}
2582 @kindex ignore
2583 Set the ignore count of breakpoint number @var{bnum} to @var{count}.
2584 The next @var{count} times the breakpoint is reached, your program's
2585 execution will not stop; other than to decrement the ignore count, @value{GDBN}
2586 takes no action.
2587
2588 To make the breakpoint stop the next time it is reached, specify
2589 a count of zero.
2590
2591 When you use @code{continue} to resume execution of your program from a
2592 breakpoint, you can specify an ignore count directly as an argument to
2593 @code{continue}, rather than using @code{ignore}. @xref{Continuing and
2594 Stepping,,Continuing and stepping}.
2595
2596 If a breakpoint has a positive ignore count and a condition, the condition
2597 is not checked. Once the ignore count reaches zero, the condition will
2598 be checked.
2599
2600 You could achieve the effect of the ignore count with a condition such
2601 as @w{@samp{$foo-- <= 0}} using a debugger convenience variable that
2602 is decremented each time. @xref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
2603 variables}.
2604 @end table
2605
2606 @node Break Commands
2607 @subsection Breakpoint command lists
2608
2609 @cindex breakpoint commands
2610 You can give any breakpoint (or watchpoint) a series of commands to
2611 execute when your program stops due to that breakpoint. For example, you
2612 might want to print the values of certain expressions, or enable other
2613 breakpoints.
2614
2615 @table @code
2616 @item commands @r{[}@var{bnum}@r{]}
2617 @itemx @dots{} @var{command-list} @dots{}
2618 @itemx end
2619 @kindex commands
2620 @kindex end
2621 Specify a list of commands for breakpoint number @var{bnum}. The commands
2622 themselves appear on the following lines. Type a line containing just
2623 @code{end} to terminate the commands.
2624
2625 To remove all commands from a breakpoint, type @code{commands} and
2626 follow it immediately with @code{end}; that is, give no commands.
2627
2628 With no @var{bnum} argument, @code{commands} refers to the last
2629 breakpoint or watchpoint set (not to the breakpoint most recently
2630 encountered).
2631 @end table
2632
2633 Pressing @key{RET} as a means of repeating the last @value{GDBN} command is
2634 disabled within a @var{command-list}.
2635
2636 You can use breakpoint commands to start your program up again. Simply
2637 use the @code{continue} command, or @code{step}, or any other command
2638 that resumes execution.
2639
2640 Any other commands in the command list, after a command that resumes
2641 execution, are ignored. This is because any time you resume execution
2642 (even with a simple @code{next} or @code{step}), you may encounter
2643 another breakpoint---which could have its own command list, leading to
2644 ambiguities about which list to execute.
2645
2646 @kindex silent
2647 If the first command you specify in a command list is @code{silent}, the
2648 usual message about stopping at a breakpoint is not printed. This may
2649 be desirable for breakpoints that are to print a specific message and
2650 then continue. If none of the remaining commands print anything, you
2651 will see no sign that the breakpoint was reached. @code{silent} is
2652 meaningful only at the beginning of a breakpoint command list.
2653
2654 The commands @code{echo}, @code{output}, and @code{printf} allow you to
2655 print precisely controlled output, and are often useful in silent
2656 breakpoints. @xref{Output, ,Commands for controlled output}.
2657
2658 For example, here is how you could use breakpoint commands to print the
2659 value of @code{x} at entry to @code{foo} whenever @code{x} is positive.
2660
2661 @example
2662 break foo if x>0
2663 commands
2664 silent
2665 printf "x is %d\n",x
2666 cont
2667 end
2668 @end example
2669
2670 One application for breakpoint commands is to compensate for one bug so
2671 you can test for another. Put a breakpoint just after the erroneous line
2672 of code, give it a condition to detect the case in which something
2673 erroneous has been done, and give it commands to assign correct values
2674 to any variables that need them. End with the @code{continue} command
2675 so that your program does not stop, and start with the @code{silent}
2676 command so that no output is produced. Here is an example:
2677
2678 @example
2679 break 403
2680 commands
2681 silent
2682 set x = y + 4
2683 cont
2684 end
2685 @end example
2686
2687 @ifclear CONLY
2688 @node Breakpoint Menus
2689 @subsection Breakpoint menus
2690 @cindex overloading
2691 @cindex symbol overloading
2692
2693 Some programming languages (notably C++) permit a single function name
2694 to be defined several times, for application in different contexts.
2695 This is called @dfn{overloading}. When a function name is overloaded,
2696 @samp{break @var{function}} is not enough to tell @value{GDBN} where you want
2697 a breakpoint. If you realize this will be a problem, you can use
2698 something like @samp{break @var{function}(@var{types})} to specify which
2699 particular version of the function you want. Otherwise, @value{GDBN} offers
2700 you a menu of numbered choices for different possible breakpoints, and
2701 waits for your selection with the prompt @samp{>}. The first two
2702 options are always @samp{[0] cancel} and @samp{[1] all}. Typing @kbd{1}
2703 sets a breakpoint at each definition of @var{function}, and typing
2704 @kbd{0} aborts the @code{break} command without setting any new
2705 breakpoints.
2706
2707 For example, the following session excerpt shows an attempt to set a
2708 breakpoint at the overloaded symbol @code{String::after}.
2709 We choose three particular definitions of that function name:
2710
2711 @c FIXME! This is likely to change to show arg type lists, at least
2712 @smallexample
2713 (@value{GDBP}) b String::after
2714 [0] cancel
2715 [1] all
2716 [2] file:String.cc; line number:867
2717 [3] file:String.cc; line number:860
2718 [4] file:String.cc; line number:875
2719 [5] file:String.cc; line number:853
2720 [6] file:String.cc; line number:846
2721 [7] file:String.cc; line number:735
2722 > 2 4 6
2723 Breakpoint 1 at 0xb26c: file String.cc, line 867.
2724 Breakpoint 2 at 0xb344: file String.cc, line 875.
2725 Breakpoint 3 at 0xafcc: file String.cc, line 846.
2726 Multiple breakpoints were set.
2727 Use the "delete" command to delete unwanted
2728 breakpoints.
2729 (@value{GDBP})
2730 @end smallexample
2731 @end ifclear
2732
2733 @ifclear BARETARGET
2734 @node Error in Breakpoints
2735 @subsection ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
2736
2737 @c FIXME: "cannot insert breakpoints" error, v unclear.
2738 @c Q in pending mail to Gilmore. ---pesch@cygnus.com, 26mar91
2739 @c some light may be shed by looking at instances of
2740 @c ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT. But error message seems possible otherwise
2741 @c too. pesch, 20sep91
2742 Under some operating systems, breakpoints cannot be used in a program if
2743 any other process is running that program. In this situation,
2744 attempting to run or continue a program with a breakpoint causes @value{GDBN}
2745 to stop the other process.
2746
2747 When this happens, you have three ways to proceed:
2748
2749 @enumerate
2750 @item
2751 Remove or disable the breakpoints, then continue.
2752
2753 @item
2754 Suspend @value{GDBN}, and copy the file containing your program to a new name.
2755 Resume @value{GDBN} and use the @code{exec-file} command to specify that @value{GDBN}
2756 should run your program under that name. Then start your program again.
2757
2758 @c FIXME: RMS commented here "Show example". Maybe when someone
2759 @c explains the first FIXME: in this section...
2760
2761 @item
2762 Relink your program so that the text segment is nonsharable, using the
2763 linker option @samp{-N}. The operating system limitation may not apply
2764 to nonsharable executables.
2765 @end enumerate
2766 @end ifclear
2767
2768 @node Continuing and Stepping
2769 @section Continuing and stepping
2770
2771 @cindex stepping
2772 @cindex continuing
2773 @cindex resuming execution
2774 @dfn{Continuing} means resuming program execution until your program
2775 completes normally. In contrast, @dfn{stepping} means executing just
2776 one more ``step'' of your program, where ``step'' may mean either one
2777 line of source code, or one machine instruction (depending on what
2778 particular command you use). Either when continuing
2779 or when stepping, your program may stop even sooner, due to
2780 @ifset BARETARGET
2781 a breakpoint.
2782 @end ifset
2783 @ifclear BARETARGET
2784 a breakpoint or a signal. (If due to a signal, you may want to use
2785 @code{handle}, or use @samp{signal 0} to resume execution.
2786 @xref{Signals, ,Signals}.)
2787 @end ifclear
2788
2789 @table @code
2790 @item continue @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
2791 @itemx c @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
2792 @itemx fg @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
2793 @kindex continue
2794 @kindex c
2795 @kindex fg
2796 Resume program execution, at the address where your program last stopped;
2797 any breakpoints set at that address are bypassed. The optional argument
2798 @var{ignore-count} allows you to specify a further number of times to
2799 ignore a breakpoint at this location; its effect is like that of
2800 @code{ignore} (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}).
2801
2802 The argument @var{ignore-count} is meaningful only when your program
2803 stopped due to a breakpoint. At other times, the argument to
2804 @code{continue} is ignored.
2805
2806 The synonyms @code{c} and @code{fg} are provided purely for convenience,
2807 and have exactly the same behavior as @code{continue}.
2808 @end table
2809
2810 To resume execution at a different place, you can use @code{return}
2811 (@pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a function}) to go back to the
2812 calling function; or @code{jump} (@pxref{Jumping, ,Continuing at a
2813 different address}) to go to an arbitrary location in your program.
2814
2815 A typical technique for using stepping is to set a breakpoint
2816 @ifclear CONLY
2817 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints; watchpoints; and exceptions})
2818 @end ifclear
2819 @ifset CONLY
2820 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints and watchpoints})
2821 @end ifset
2822 at the
2823 beginning of the function or the section of your program where a
2824 problem is believed to lie, run your program until it stops at that
2825 breakpoint, and then step through the suspect area, examining the
2826 variables that are interesting, until you see the problem happen.
2827
2828 @table @code
2829 @item step
2830 @kindex step
2831 @kindex s
2832 Continue running your program until control reaches a different source
2833 line, then stop it and return control to @value{GDBN}. This command is
2834 abbreviated @code{s}.
2835
2836 @quotation
2837 @emph{Warning:} If you use the @code{step} command while control is
2838 within a function that was compiled without debugging information,
2839 execution proceeds until control reaches a function that does have
2840 debugging information.
2841 @end quotation
2842
2843 @item step @var{count}
2844 Continue running as in @code{step}, but do so @var{count} times. If a
2845 breakpoint is reached,
2846 @ifclear BARETARGET
2847 or a signal not related to stepping occurs before @var{count} steps,
2848 @end ifclear
2849 stepping stops right away.
2850
2851 @item next @r{[}@var{count}@r{]}
2852 @kindex next
2853 @kindex n
2854 Continue to the next source line in the current (innermost) stack frame.
2855 Similar to @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the line
2856 of code are executed without stopping. Execution stops when control
2857 reaches a different line of code at the stack level which was executing
2858 when the @code{next} command was given. This command is abbreviated
2859 @code{n}.
2860
2861 An argument @var{count} is a repeat count, as for @code{step}.
2862
2863 @code{next} within a function that lacks debugging information acts like
2864 @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the code of the
2865 function are executed without stopping.
2866
2867 @item finish
2868 @kindex finish
2869 Continue running until just after function in the selected stack frame
2870 returns. Print the returned value (if any).
2871
2872 Contrast this with the @code{return} command (@pxref{Returning,
2873 ,Returning from a function}).
2874
2875 @item until
2876 @kindex until
2877 @itemx u
2878 @kindex u
2879 Continue running until a source line past the current line, in the
2880 current stack frame, is reached. This command is used to avoid single
2881 stepping through a loop more than once. It is like the @code{next}
2882 command, except that when @code{until} encounters a jump, it
2883 automatically continues execution until the program counter is greater
2884 than the address of the jump.
2885
2886 This means that when you reach the end of a loop after single stepping
2887 though it, @code{until} will cause your program to continue execution
2888 until the loop is exited. In contrast, a @code{next} command at the end
2889 of a loop will simply step back to the beginning of the loop, which
2890 would force you to step through the next iteration.
2891
2892 @code{until} always stops your program if it attempts to exit the current
2893 stack frame.
2894
2895 @code{until} may produce somewhat counterintuitive results if the order
2896 of machine code does not match the order of the source lines. For
2897 example, in the following excerpt from a debugging session, the @code{f}
2898 (@code{frame}) command shows that execution is stopped at line
2899 @code{206}; yet when we use @code{until}, we get to line @code{195}:
2900
2901 @example
2902 (@value{GDBP}) f
2903 #0 main (argc=4, argv=0xf7fffae8) at m4.c:206
2904 206 expand_input();
2905 (@value{GDBP}) until
2906 195 for ( ; argc > 0; NEXTARG) @{
2907 @end example
2908
2909 This happened because, for execution efficiency, the compiler had
2910 generated code for the loop closure test at the end, rather than the
2911 start, of the loop---even though the test in a C @code{for}-loop is
2912 written before the body of the loop. The @code{until} command appeared
2913 to step back to the beginning of the loop when it advanced to this
2914 expression; however, it has not really gone to an earlier
2915 statement---not in terms of the actual machine code.
2916
2917 @code{until} with no argument works by means of single
2918 instruction stepping, and hence is slower than @code{until} with an
2919 argument.
2920
2921 @item until @var{location}
2922 @itemx u @var{location}
2923 Continue running your program until either the specified location is
2924 reached, or the current stack frame returns. @var{location} is any of
2925 the forms of argument acceptable to @code{break} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
2926 ,Setting breakpoints}). This form of the command uses breakpoints,
2927 and hence is quicker than @code{until} without an argument.
2928
2929 @item stepi
2930 @itemx si
2931 @kindex stepi
2932 @kindex si
2933 Execute one machine instruction, then stop and return to the debugger.
2934
2935 It is often useful to do @samp{display/i $pc} when stepping by machine
2936 instructions. This will cause the next instruction to be executed to
2937 be displayed automatically at each stop. @xref{Auto Display,
2938 ,Automatic display}.
2939
2940 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{step}.
2941
2942 @need 750
2943 @item nexti
2944 @itemx ni
2945 @kindex nexti
2946 @kindex ni
2947 Execute one machine instruction, but if it is a function call,
2948 proceed until the function returns.
2949
2950 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{next}.
2951 @end table
2952
2953 @ifset POSIX
2954 @node Signals
2955 @section Signals
2956 @cindex signals
2957
2958 A signal is an asynchronous event that can happen in a program. The
2959 operating system defines the possible kinds of signals, and gives each
2960 kind a name and a number. For example, in Unix @code{SIGINT} is the
2961 signal a program gets when you type an interrupt (often @kbd{C-c});
2962 @code{SIGSEGV} is the signal a program gets from referencing a place in
2963 memory far away from all the areas in use; @code{SIGALRM} occurs when
2964 the alarm clock timer goes off (which happens only if your program has
2965 requested an alarm).
2966
2967 @cindex fatal signals
2968 Some signals, including @code{SIGALRM}, are a normal part of the
2969 functioning of your program. Others, such as @code{SIGSEGV}, indicate
2970 errors; these signals are @dfn{fatal} (kill your program immediately) if the
2971 program has not specified in advance some other way to handle the signal.
2972 @code{SIGINT} does not indicate an error in your program, but it is normally
2973 fatal so it can carry out the purpose of the interrupt: to kill the program.
2974
2975 @value{GDBN} has the ability to detect any occurrence of a signal in your
2976 program. You can tell @value{GDBN} in advance what to do for each kind of
2977 signal.
2978
2979 @cindex handling signals
2980 Normally, @value{GDBN} is set up to ignore non-erroneous signals like @code{SIGALRM}
2981 (so as not to interfere with their role in the functioning of your program)
2982 but to stop your program immediately whenever an error signal happens.
2983 You can change these settings with the @code{handle} command.
2984
2985 @table @code
2986 @item info signals
2987 @kindex info signals
2988 Print a table of all the kinds of signals and how @value{GDBN} has been told to
2989 handle each one. You can use this to see the signal numbers of all
2990 the defined types of signals.
2991
2992 @item handle @var{signal} @var{keywords}@dots{}
2993 @kindex handle
2994 Change the way @value{GDBN} handles signal @var{signal}. @var{signal} can be the
2995 number of a signal or its name (with or without the @samp{SIG} at the
2996 beginning). The @var{keywords} say what change to make.
2997 @end table
2998
2999 @c @group
3000 The keywords allowed by the @code{handle} command can be abbreviated.
3001 Their full names are:
3002
3003 @table @code
3004 @item nostop
3005 @value{GDBN} should not stop your program when this signal happens. It may
3006 still print a message telling you that the signal has come in.
3007
3008 @item stop
3009 @value{GDBN} should stop your program when this signal happens. This implies
3010 the @code{print} keyword as well.
3011
3012 @item print
3013 @value{GDBN} should print a message when this signal happens.
3014
3015 @item noprint
3016 @value{GDBN} should not mention the occurrence of the signal at all. This
3017 implies the @code{nostop} keyword as well.
3018
3019 @item pass
3020 @value{GDBN} should allow your program to see this signal; your program will be
3021 able to handle the signal, or may be terminated if the signal is fatal
3022 and not handled.
3023
3024 @item nopass
3025 @value{GDBN} should not allow your program to see this signal.
3026 @end table
3027 @c @end group
3028
3029 When a signal stops your program, the signal is not visible until you
3030 continue. Your program will see the signal then, if @code{pass} is in
3031 effect for the signal in question @emph{at that time}. In other words,
3032 after @value{GDBN} reports a signal, you can use the @code{handle}
3033 command with @code{pass} or @code{nopass} to control whether that
3034 signal will be seen by your program when you later continue it.
3035
3036 You can also use the @code{signal} command to prevent your program from
3037 seeing a signal, or cause it to see a signal it normally would not see,
3038 or to give it any signal at any time. For example, if your program stopped
3039 due to some sort of memory reference error, you might store correct
3040 values into the erroneous variables and continue, hoping to see more
3041 execution; but your program would probably terminate immediately as
3042 a result of the fatal signal once it saw the signal. To prevent this,
3043 you can continue with @samp{signal 0}. @xref{Signaling, ,Giving your
3044 program a signal}.
3045 @end ifset
3046
3047 @ifclear BARETARGET
3048 @node Thread Stops
3049 @section Stopping and starting multi-thread programs
3050
3051 When your program has multiple threads (@pxref{Threads,, Debugging
3052 programs with multiple threads}), you can choose whether to set
3053 breakpoints on all threads, or on a particular thread.
3054
3055 @table @code
3056 @cindex breakpoints and threads
3057 @cindex thread breakpoints
3058 @kindex break @dots{} thread @var{threadno}
3059 @item break @var{linespec} thread @var{threadno}
3060 @itemx break @var{linespec} thread @var{threadno} if @dots{}
3061 Use the qualifier @samp{thread @var{threadno}} with a breakpoint command
3062 to specify that you only want @value{GDBN} to stop the program when a
3063 particular thread reaches this breakpoint. @var{threadno} is one of the
3064 numeric thread identifiers assigned by @value{GDBN}, shown in the first
3065 column of the @samp{info threads} display.
3066
3067 If you do not specify @samp{thread @var{threadno}} when you set a
3068 breakpoint, the breakpoint applies to @emph{all} threads of your
3069 program.
3070
3071 You can use the @code{thread} qualifier on conditional breakpoints as
3072 well; in this case, place @samp{thread @var{threadno}} before the
3073 breakpoint condition, like this:
3074
3075 @smallexample
3076 (gdb) break frik.c:13 thread 28 if bartab > lim
3077 @end smallexample
3078 @end table
3079
3080 @cindex stopped threads
3081 @cindex threads, stopped
3082 Whenever your program stops under @value{GDBN} for any reason,
3083 @emph{all} threads of execution stop, not just the current thread. This
3084 allows you to examine the overall state of the program, including
3085 switching between threads, without worrying that things may change
3086 underfoot.
3087
3088 @cindex continuing threads
3089 @cindex threads, continuing
3090 Conversely, whenever you restart the program, @emph{all} threads start
3091 executing. @emph{This is true even when single-stepping} with commands
3092 like @code{step} or @code{next}.
3093
3094 In particular, @value{GDBN} cannot single-step all threads in lockstep.
3095 Since thread scheduling is up to your debugging target's operating
3096 system (not controlled by @value{GDBN}), other threads may
3097 execute more than one statement while the current thread completes a
3098 single step. Moreover, in general other threads stop in the middle of a
3099 statement, rather than at a clean statement boundary, when the program
3100 stops.
3101
3102 You might even find your program stopped in another thread after
3103 continuing or even single-stepping. This happens whenever some other
3104 thread runs into a breakpoint, a signal, or an exception before the
3105 first thread completes whatever you requested.
3106 @end ifclear
3107
3108 @node Stack
3109 @chapter Examining the Stack
3110
3111 When your program has stopped, the first thing you need to know is where it
3112 stopped and how it got there.
3113
3114 @cindex call stack
3115 Each time your program performs a function call, the information about
3116 where in your program the call was made from is saved in a block of data
3117 called a @dfn{stack frame}. The frame also contains the arguments of the
3118 call and the local variables of the function that was called. All the
3119 stack frames are allocated in a region of memory called the @dfn{call
3120 stack}.
3121
3122 When your program stops, the @value{GDBN} commands for examining the
3123 stack allow you to see all of this information.
3124
3125 @cindex selected frame
3126 One of the stack frames is @dfn{selected} by @value{GDBN} and many
3127 @value{GDBN} commands refer implicitly to the selected frame. In
3128 particular, whenever you ask @value{GDBN} for the value of a variable in
3129 your program, the value is found in the selected frame. There are
3130 special @value{GDBN} commands to select whichever frame you are
3131 interested in.
3132
3133 When your program stops, @value{GDBN} automatically selects the
3134 currently executing frame and describes it briefly as the @code{frame}
3135 command does (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}).
3136
3137 @menu
3138 * Frames:: Stack frames
3139 * Backtrace:: Backtraces
3140 * Selection:: Selecting a frame
3141 * Frame Info:: Information on a frame
3142 @ifset MIPS
3143 * MIPS Stack:: MIPS machines and the function stack
3144 @end ifset
3145 @end menu
3146
3147 @node Frames
3148 @section Stack frames
3149
3150 @cindex frame
3151 @cindex stack frame
3152 The call stack is divided up into contiguous pieces called @dfn{stack
3153 frames}, or @dfn{frames} for short; each frame is the data associated
3154 with one call to one function. The frame contains the arguments given
3155 to the function, the function's local variables, and the address at
3156 which the function is executing.
3157
3158 @cindex initial frame
3159 @cindex outermost frame
3160 @cindex innermost frame
3161 When your program is started, the stack has only one frame, that of the
3162 function @code{main}. This is called the @dfn{initial} frame or the
3163 @dfn{outermost} frame. Each time a function is called, a new frame is
3164 made. Each time a function returns, the frame for that function invocation
3165 is eliminated. If a function is recursive, there can be many frames for
3166 the same function. The frame for the function in which execution is
3167 actually occurring is called the @dfn{innermost} frame. This is the most
3168 recently created of all the stack frames that still exist.
3169
3170 @cindex frame pointer
3171 Inside your program, stack frames are identified by their addresses. A
3172 stack frame consists of many bytes, each of which has its own address; each
3173 kind of computer has a convention for choosing one of those bytes whose
3174 address serves as the address of the frame. Usually this address is kept
3175 in a register called the @dfn{frame pointer register} while execution is
3176 going on in that frame.
3177
3178 @cindex frame number
3179 @value{GDBN} assigns numbers to all existing stack frames, starting with
3180 zero for the innermost frame, one for the frame that called it,
3181 and so on upward. These numbers do not really exist in your program;
3182 they are assigned by @value{GDBN} to give you a way of designating stack
3183 frames in @value{GDBN} commands.
3184
3185 @c below produces an acceptable overful hbox. --mew 13aug1993
3186 @cindex frameless execution
3187 Some compilers provide a way to compile functions so that they operate
3188 without stack frames. (For example, the @code{@value{GCC}} option
3189 @samp{-fomit-frame-pointer} will generate functions without a frame.)
3190 This is occasionally done with heavily used library functions to save
3191 the frame setup time. @value{GDBN} has limited facilities for dealing
3192 with these function invocations. If the innermost function invocation
3193 has no stack frame, @value{GDBN} will nevertheless regard it as though
3194 it had a separate frame, which is numbered zero as usual, allowing
3195 correct tracing of the function call chain. However, @value{GDBN} has
3196 no provision for frameless functions elsewhere in the stack.
3197
3198 @node Backtrace
3199 @section Backtraces
3200
3201 A backtrace is a summary of how your program got where it is. It shows one
3202 line per frame, for many frames, starting with the currently executing
3203 frame (frame zero), followed by its caller (frame one), and on up the
3204 stack.
3205
3206 @table @code
3207 @item backtrace
3208 @itemx bt
3209 @kindex backtrace
3210 @kindex bt
3211 Print a backtrace of the entire stack: one line per frame for all
3212 frames in the stack.
3213
3214 You can stop the backtrace at any time by typing the system interrupt
3215 character, normally @kbd{C-c}.
3216
3217 @item backtrace @var{n}
3218 @itemx bt @var{n}
3219 Similar, but print only the innermost @var{n} frames.
3220
3221 @item backtrace -@var{n}
3222 @itemx bt -@var{n}
3223 Similar, but print only the outermost @var{n} frames.
3224 @end table
3225
3226 @kindex where
3227 @kindex info stack
3228 @kindex info s
3229 The names @code{where} and @code{info stack} (abbreviated @code{info s})
3230 are additional aliases for @code{backtrace}.
3231
3232 Each line in the backtrace shows the frame number and the function name.
3233 The program counter value is also shown---unless you use @code{set
3234 print address off}. The backtrace also shows the source file name and
3235 line number, as well as the arguments to the function. The program
3236 counter value is omitted if it is at the beginning of the code for that
3237 line number.
3238
3239 Here is an example of a backtrace. It was made with the command
3240 @samp{bt 3}, so it shows the innermost three frames.
3241
3242 @smallexample
3243 @group
3244 #0 m4_traceon (obs=0x24eb0, argc=1, argv=0x2b8c8)
3245 at builtin.c:993
3246 #1 0x6e38 in expand_macro (sym=0x2b600) at macro.c:242
3247 #2 0x6840 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=177664, td=0xf7fffb08)
3248 at macro.c:71
3249 (More stack frames follow...)
3250 @end group
3251 @end smallexample
3252
3253 @noindent
3254 The display for frame zero does not begin with a program counter
3255 value, indicating that your program has stopped at the beginning of the
3256 code for line @code{993} of @code{builtin.c}.
3257
3258 @node Selection
3259 @section Selecting a frame
3260
3261 Most commands for examining the stack and other data in your program work on
3262 whichever stack frame is selected at the moment. Here are the commands for
3263 selecting a stack frame; all of them finish by printing a brief description
3264 of the stack frame just selected.
3265
3266 @table @code
3267 @item frame @var{n}
3268 @itemx f @var{n}
3269 @kindex frame
3270 @kindex f
3271 Select frame number @var{n}. Recall that frame zero is the innermost
3272 (currently executing) frame, frame one is the frame that called the
3273 innermost one, and so on. The highest-numbered frame is the one for
3274 @code{main}.
3275
3276 @item frame @var{addr}
3277 @itemx f @var{addr}
3278 Select the frame at address @var{addr}. This is useful mainly if the
3279 chaining of stack frames has been damaged by a bug, making it
3280 impossible for @value{GDBN} to assign numbers properly to all frames. In
3281 addition, this can be useful when your program has multiple stacks and
3282 switches between them.
3283
3284 @ifset SPARC
3285 On the SPARC architecture, @code{frame} needs two addresses to
3286 select an arbitrary frame: a frame pointer and a stack pointer.
3287 @c note to future updaters: this is conditioned on a flag
3288 @c FRAME_SPECIFICATION_DYADIC in the tm-*.h files, currently only used
3289 @c by SPARC, hence the specific attribution. Generalize or list all
3290 @c possibilities if more supported machines start doing this.
3291 @end ifset
3292
3293 @item up @var{n}
3294 @kindex up
3295 Move @var{n} frames up the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3296 advances toward the outermost frame, to higher frame numbers, to frames
3297 that have existed longer. @var{n} defaults to one.
3298
3299 @item down @var{n}
3300 @kindex down
3301 @kindex do
3302 Move @var{n} frames down the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3303 advances toward the innermost frame, to lower frame numbers, to frames
3304 that were created more recently. @var{n} defaults to one. You may
3305 abbreviate @code{down} as @code{do}.
3306 @end table
3307
3308 All of these commands end by printing two lines of output describing the
3309 frame. The first line shows the frame number, the function name, the
3310 arguments, and the source file and line number of execution in that
3311 frame. The second line shows the text of that source line.
3312
3313 @need 1000
3314 For example:
3315
3316 @smallexample
3317 @group
3318 (@value{GDBP}) up
3319 #1 0x22f0 in main (argc=1, argv=0xf7fffbf4, env=0xf7fffbfc)
3320 at env.c:10
3321 10 read_input_file (argv[i]);
3322 @end group
3323 @end smallexample
3324
3325 After such a printout, the @code{list} command with no arguments will
3326 print ten lines centered on the point of execution in the frame.
3327 @xref{List, ,Printing source lines}.
3328
3329 @table @code
3330 @item up-silently @var{n}
3331 @itemx down-silently @var{n}
3332 @kindex down-silently
3333 @kindex up-silently
3334 These two commands are variants of @code{up} and @code{down},
3335 respectively; they differ in that they do their work silently, without
3336 causing display of the new frame. They are intended primarily for use
3337 in @value{GDBN} command scripts, where the output might be unnecessary and
3338 distracting.
3339 @end table
3340
3341 @node Frame Info
3342 @section Information about a frame
3343
3344 There are several other commands to print information about the selected
3345 stack frame.
3346
3347 @table @code
3348 @item frame
3349 @itemx f
3350 When used without any argument, this command does not change which
3351 frame is selected, but prints a brief description of the currently
3352 selected stack frame. It can be abbreviated @code{f}. With an
3353 argument, this command is used to select a stack frame.
3354 @xref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}.
3355
3356 @item info frame
3357 @itemx info f
3358 @kindex info frame
3359 @kindex info f
3360 This command prints a verbose description of the selected stack frame,
3361 including the address of the frame, the addresses of the next frame down
3362 (called by this frame) and the next frame up (caller of this frame), the
3363 language that the source code corresponding to this frame was written in,
3364 the address of the frame's arguments, the program counter saved in it
3365 (the address of execution in the caller frame), and which registers
3366 were saved in the frame. The verbose description is useful when
3367 something has gone wrong that has made the stack format fail to fit
3368 the usual conventions.
3369
3370 @item info frame @var{addr}
3371 @itemx info f @var{addr}
3372 Print a verbose description of the frame at address @var{addr},
3373 without selecting that frame. The selected frame remains unchanged by
3374 this command.
3375
3376 @item info args
3377 @kindex info args
3378 Print the arguments of the selected frame, each on a separate line.
3379
3380 @item info locals
3381 @kindex info locals
3382 Print the local variables of the selected frame, each on a separate
3383 line. These are all variables (declared either static or automatic)
3384 accessible at the point of execution of the selected frame.
3385
3386 @ifclear CONLY
3387 @item info catch
3388 @kindex info catch
3389 @cindex catch exceptions
3390 @cindex exception handlers
3391 Print a list of all the exception handlers that are active in the
3392 current stack frame at the current point of execution. To see other
3393 exception handlers, visit the associated frame (using the @code{up},
3394 @code{down}, or @code{frame} commands); then type @code{info catch}.
3395 @xref{Exception Handling, ,Breakpoints and exceptions}.
3396 @end ifclear
3397 @end table
3398
3399 @ifset MIPS
3400 @node MIPS Stack
3401 @section MIPS machines and the function stack
3402
3403 @cindex stack on MIPS
3404 @cindex MIPS stack
3405 MIPS based computers use an unusual stack frame, which sometimes
3406 requires @value{GDBN} to search backward in the object code to find the
3407 beginning of a function.
3408
3409 @cindex response time, MIPS debugging
3410 To improve response time (especially for embedded applications, where
3411 @value{GDBN} may be restricted to a slow serial line for this search)
3412 you may want to limit the size of this search, using one of these
3413 commands:
3414 @c FIXME! So what happens when GDB does *not* find the beginning of a
3415 @c function?
3416
3417 @cindex @code{heuristic-fence-post} (MIPS)
3418 @table @code
3419 @item set heuristic-fence-post @var{limit}
3420 Restrict @value{GDBN} to examining at most @var{limit} bytes in its search
3421 for the beginning of a function. A value of @code{0} (the default)
3422 means there is no limit.
3423
3424 @item show heuristic-fence-post
3425 Display the current limit.
3426 @end table
3427
3428 @noindent
3429 These commands are available @emph{only} when @value{GDBN} is configured
3430 for debugging programs on MIPS processors.
3431 @end ifset
3432
3433 @node Source
3434 @chapter Examining Source Files
3435
3436 @value{GDBN} can print parts of your program's source, since the debugging
3437 information recorded in the program tells @value{GDBN} what source files were
3438 used to build it. When your program stops, @value{GDBN} spontaneously prints
3439 the line where it stopped. Likewise, when you select a stack frame
3440 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}), @value{GDBN} prints the line where
3441 execution in that frame has stopped. You can print other portions of
3442 source files by explicit command.
3443
3444 @ifclear DOSHOST
3445 If you use @value{GDBN} through its GNU Emacs interface, you may prefer to use
3446 Emacs facilities to view source; @pxref{Emacs, ,Using @value{GDBN} under GNU
3447 Emacs}.
3448 @end ifclear
3449
3450 @menu
3451 * List:: Printing source lines
3452 @ifclear DOSHOST
3453 * Search:: Searching source files
3454 @end ifclear
3455
3456 * Source Path:: Specifying source directories
3457 * Machine Code:: Source and machine code
3458 @end menu
3459
3460 @node List
3461 @section Printing source lines
3462
3463 @kindex list
3464 @kindex l
3465 To print lines from a source file, use the @code{list} command
3466 (abbreviated @code{l}). There are several ways to specify what part
3467 of the file you want to print.
3468
3469 Here are the forms of the @code{list} command most commonly used:
3470
3471 @table @code
3472 @item list @var{linenum}
3473 Print lines centered around line number @var{linenum} in the
3474 current source file.
3475
3476 @item list @var{function}
3477 Print lines centered around the beginning of function
3478 @var{function}.
3479
3480 @item list
3481 Print more lines. If the last lines printed were printed with a
3482 @code{list} command, this prints lines following the last lines
3483 printed; however, if the last line printed was a solitary line printed
3484 as part of displaying a stack frame (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the
3485 Stack}), this prints lines centered around that line.
3486
3487 @item list -
3488 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
3489 @end table
3490
3491 By default, @value{GDBN} prints ten source lines with any of these forms of
3492 the @code{list} command. You can change this using @code{set listsize}:
3493
3494 @table @code
3495 @item set listsize @var{count}
3496 @kindex set listsize
3497 Make the @code{list} command display @var{count} source lines (unless
3498 the @code{list} argument explicitly specifies some other number).
3499
3500 @item show listsize
3501 @kindex show listsize
3502 Display the number of lines that @code{list} will currently display by
3503 default.
3504 @end table
3505
3506 Repeating a @code{list} command with @key{RET} discards the argument,
3507 so it is equivalent to typing just @code{list}. This is more useful
3508 than listing the same lines again. An exception is made for an
3509 argument of @samp{-}; that argument is preserved in repetition so that
3510 each repetition moves up in the source file.
3511
3512 @cindex linespec
3513 In general, the @code{list} command expects you to supply zero, one or two
3514 @dfn{linespecs}. Linespecs specify source lines; there are several ways
3515 of writing them but the effect is always to specify some source line.
3516 Here is a complete description of the possible arguments for @code{list}:
3517
3518 @table @code
3519 @item list @var{linespec}
3520 Print lines centered around the line specified by @var{linespec}.
3521
3522 @item list @var{first},@var{last}
3523 Print lines from @var{first} to @var{last}. Both arguments are
3524 linespecs.
3525
3526 @item list ,@var{last}
3527 Print lines ending with @var{last}.
3528
3529 @item list @var{first},
3530 Print lines starting with @var{first}.
3531
3532 @item list +
3533 Print lines just after the lines last printed.
3534
3535 @item list -
3536 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
3537
3538 @item list
3539 As described in the preceding table.
3540 @end table
3541
3542 Here are the ways of specifying a single source line---all the
3543 kinds of linespec.
3544
3545 @table @code
3546 @item @var{number}
3547 Specifies line @var{number} of the current source file.
3548 When a @code{list} command has two linespecs, this refers to
3549 the same source file as the first linespec.
3550
3551 @item +@var{offset}
3552 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines after the last line printed.
3553 When used as the second linespec in a @code{list} command that has
3554 two, this specifies the line @var{offset} lines down from the
3555 first linespec.
3556
3557 @item -@var{offset}
3558 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines before the last line printed.
3559
3560 @item @var{filename}:@var{number}
3561 Specifies line @var{number} in the source file @var{filename}.
3562
3563 @item @var{function}
3564 @c FIXME: "of the open-brace" is C-centric. When we add other langs...
3565 Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
3566 function @var{function}.
3567
3568 @item @var{filename}:@var{function}
3569 Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
3570 function @var{function} in the file @var{filename}. You only need the
3571 file name with a function name to avoid ambiguity when there are
3572 identically named functions in different source files.
3573
3574 @item *@var{address}
3575 Specifies the line containing the program address @var{address}.
3576 @var{address} may be any expression.
3577 @end table
3578
3579 @ifclear DOSHOST
3580 @node Search
3581 @section Searching source files
3582 @cindex searching
3583 @kindex reverse-search
3584
3585 There are two commands for searching through the current source file for a
3586 regular expression.
3587
3588 @table @code
3589 @item forward-search @var{regexp}
3590 @itemx search @var{regexp}
3591 @kindex search
3592 @kindex forward-search
3593 The command @samp{forward-search @var{regexp}} checks each line,
3594 starting with the one following the last line listed, for a match for
3595 @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can use
3596 synonym @samp{search @var{regexp}} or abbreviate the command name as
3597 @code{fo}.
3598
3599 @item reverse-search @var{regexp}
3600 The command @samp{reverse-search @var{regexp}} checks each line, starting
3601 with the one before the last line listed and going backward, for a match
3602 for @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can abbreviate
3603 this command as @code{rev}.
3604 @end table
3605 @end ifclear
3606
3607 @node Source Path
3608 @section Specifying source directories
3609
3610 @cindex source path
3611 @cindex directories for source files
3612 Executable programs sometimes do not record the directories of the source
3613 files from which they were compiled, just the names. Even when they do,
3614 the directories could be moved between the compilation and your debugging
3615 session. @value{GDBN} has a list of directories to search for source files;
3616 this is called the @dfn{source path}. Each time @value{GDBN} wants a source file,
3617 it tries all the directories in the list, in the order they are present
3618 in the list, until it finds a file with the desired name. Note that
3619 the executable search path is @emph{not} used for this purpose. Neither is
3620 the current working directory, unless it happens to be in the source
3621 path.
3622
3623 If @value{GDBN} cannot find a source file in the source path, and the object
3624 program records a directory, @value{GDBN} tries that directory too. If the
3625 source path is empty, and there is no record of the compilation
3626 directory, @value{GDBN} will, as a last resort, look in the current
3627 directory.
3628
3629 Whenever you reset or rearrange the source path, @value{GDBN} will clear out
3630 any information it has cached about where source files are found and where
3631 each line is in the file.
3632
3633 @kindex directory
3634 When you start @value{GDBN}, its source path is empty.
3635 To add other directories, use the @code{directory} command.
3636
3637 @table @code
3638 @item directory @var{dirname} @dots{}
3639 Add directory @var{dirname} to the front of the source path. Several
3640 directory names may be given to this command, separated by @samp{:} or
3641 whitespace. You may specify a directory that is already in the source
3642 path; this moves it forward, so it will be searched sooner.
3643
3644 @kindex cdir
3645 @kindex cwd
3646 @kindex $cdir
3647 @kindex $cwd
3648 @cindex compilation directory
3649 @cindex current directory
3650 @cindex working directory
3651 @cindex directory, current
3652 @cindex directory, compilation
3653 You can use the string @samp{$cdir} to refer to the compilation
3654 directory (if one is recorded), and @samp{$cwd} to refer to the current
3655 working directory. @samp{$cwd} is not the same as @samp{.}---the former
3656 tracks the current working directory as it changes during your @value{GDBN}
3657 session, while the latter is immediately expanded to the current
3658 directory at the time you add an entry to the source path.
3659
3660 @item directory
3661 Reset the source path to empty again. This requires confirmation.
3662
3663 @c RET-repeat for @code{directory} is explicitly disabled, but since
3664 @c repeating it would be a no-op we do not say that. (thanks to RMS)
3665
3666 @item show directories
3667 @kindex show directories
3668 Print the source path: show which directories it contains.
3669 @end table
3670
3671 If your source path is cluttered with directories that are no longer of
3672 interest, @value{GDBN} may sometimes cause confusion by finding the wrong
3673 versions of source. You can correct the situation as follows:
3674
3675 @enumerate
3676 @item
3677 Use @code{directory} with no argument to reset the source path to empty.
3678
3679 @item
3680 Use @code{directory} with suitable arguments to reinstall the
3681 directories you want in the source path. You can add all the
3682 directories in one command.
3683 @end enumerate
3684
3685 @node Machine Code
3686 @section Source and machine code
3687
3688 You can use the command @code{info line} to map source lines to program
3689 addresses (and vice versa), and the command @code{disassemble} to display
3690 a range of addresses as machine instructions.
3691
3692 @table @code
3693 @item info line @var{linespec}
3694 @kindex info line
3695 Print the starting and ending addresses of the compiled code for
3696 source line @var{linespec}. You can specify source lines in any of
3697 the ways understood by the @code{list} command (@pxref{List, ,Printing
3698 source lines}).
3699 @end table
3700
3701 For example, we can use @code{info line} to discover the location of
3702 the object code for the first line of function
3703 @code{m4_changequote}:
3704
3705 @smallexample
3706 (@value{GDBP}) info line m4_changecom
3707 Line 895 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x634c and ends at 0x6350.
3708 @end smallexample
3709
3710 @noindent
3711 We can also inquire (using @code{*@var{addr}} as the form for
3712 @var{linespec}) what source line covers a particular address:
3713 @smallexample
3714 (@value{GDBP}) info line *0x63ff
3715 Line 926 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x63e4 and ends at 0x6404.
3716 @end smallexample
3717
3718 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info line}
3719 After @code{info line}, the default address for the @code{x} command
3720 is changed to the starting address of the line, so that @samp{x/i} is
3721 sufficient to begin examining the machine code (@pxref{Memory,
3722 ,Examining memory}). Also, this address is saved as the value of the
3723 convenience variable @code{$_} (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
3724 variables}).
3725
3726 @table @code
3727 @kindex disassemble
3728 @item disassemble
3729 @cindex assembly instructions
3730 @cindex instructions, assembly
3731 @cindex machine instructions
3732 @cindex listing machine instructions
3733 This specialized command dumps a range of memory as machine
3734 instructions. The default memory range is the function surrounding the
3735 program counter of the selected frame. A single argument to this
3736 command is a program counter value; the function surrounding this value
3737 will be dumped. Two arguments specify a range of addresses (first
3738 inclusive, second exclusive) to dump.
3739 @end table
3740
3741 @ifclear H8EXCLUSIVE
3742 We can use @code{disassemble} to inspect the object code
3743 range shown in the last @code{info line} example (the example
3744 shows SPARC machine instructions):
3745
3746
3747 @smallexample
3748 (@value{GDBP}) disas 0x63e4 0x6404
3749 Dump of assembler code from 0x63e4 to 0x6404:
3750 0x63e4 <builtin_init+5340>: ble 0x63f8 <builtin_init+5360>
3751 0x63e8 <builtin_init+5344>: sethi %hi(0x4c00), %o0
3752 0x63ec <builtin_init+5348>: ld [%i1+4], %o0
3753 0x63f0 <builtin_init+5352>: b 0x63fc <builtin_init+5364>
3754 0x63f4 <builtin_init+5356>: ld [%o0+4], %o0
3755 0x63f8 <builtin_init+5360>: or %o0, 0x1a4, %o0
3756 0x63fc <builtin_init+5364>: call 0x9288 <path_search>
3757 0x6400 <builtin_init+5368>: nop
3758 End of assembler dump.
3759 @end smallexample
3760 @end ifclear
3761
3762 @ifset H8EXCLUSIVE
3763 For example, here is the beginning of the output for the
3764 disassembly of a function @code{fact}:
3765
3766
3767 @smallexample
3768 (@value{GDBP}) disas fact
3769 Dump of assembler code for function fact:
3770 to 0x808c:
3771 0x802c <fact>: 6d f2 mov.w r2,@@-r7
3772 0x802e <fact+2>: 6d f3 mov.w r3,@@-r7
3773 0x8030 <fact+4>: 6d f6 mov.w r6,@@-r7
3774 0x8032 <fact+6>: 0d 76 mov.w r7,r6
3775 0x8034 <fact+8>: 6f 70 00 08 mov.w @@(0x8,r7),r0
3776 0x8038 <fact+12> 19 11 sub.w r1,r1
3777 .
3778 .
3779 .
3780 @end smallexample
3781 @end ifset
3782
3783 @node Data
3784 @chapter Examining Data
3785
3786 @cindex printing data
3787 @cindex examining data
3788 @kindex print
3789 @kindex inspect
3790 @c "inspect" is not quite a synonym if you are using Epoch, which we do not
3791 @c document because it is nonstandard... Under Epoch it displays in a
3792 @c different window or something like that.
3793 The usual way to examine data in your program is with the @code{print}
3794 command (abbreviated @code{p}), or its synonym @code{inspect}.
3795 @ifclear CONLY
3796 It evaluates and prints the value of an expression of the language your
3797 program is written in (@pxref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with Different
3798 Languages}).
3799 @end ifclear
3800
3801 @table @code
3802 @item print @var{exp}
3803 @itemx print /@var{f} @var{exp}
3804 @var{exp} is an expression (in the source language). By default the
3805 value of @var{exp} is printed in a format appropriate to its data type;
3806 you can choose a different format by specifying @samp{/@var{f}}, where
3807 @var{f} is a letter specifying the format; @pxref{Output Formats,,Output
3808 formats}.
3809
3810 @item print
3811 @itemx print /@var{f}
3812 If you omit @var{exp}, @value{GDBN} displays the last value again (from the
3813 @dfn{value history}; @pxref{Value History, ,Value history}). This allows you to
3814 conveniently inspect the same value in an alternative format.
3815 @end table
3816
3817 A more low-level way of examining data is with the @code{x} command.
3818 It examines data in memory at a specified address and prints it in a
3819 specified format. @xref{Memory, ,Examining memory}.
3820
3821 If you are interested in information about types, or about how the fields
3822 of a struct
3823 @ifclear CONLY
3824 or class
3825 @end ifclear
3826 are declared, use the @code{ptype @var{exp}}
3827 command rather than @code{print}. @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
3828
3829 @menu
3830 * Expressions:: Expressions
3831 * Variables:: Program variables
3832 * Arrays:: Artificial arrays
3833 * Output Formats:: Output formats
3834 * Memory:: Examining memory
3835 * Auto Display:: Automatic display
3836 * Print Settings:: Print settings
3837 * Value History:: Value history
3838 * Convenience Vars:: Convenience variables
3839 * Registers:: Registers
3840 @ifclear HAVE-FLOAT
3841 * Floating Point Hardware:: Floating point hardware
3842 @end ifclear
3843 @end menu
3844
3845 @node Expressions
3846 @section Expressions
3847
3848 @cindex expressions
3849 @code{print} and many other @value{GDBN} commands accept an expression and
3850 compute its value. Any kind of constant, variable or operator defined
3851 by the programming language you are using is valid in an expression in
3852 @value{GDBN}. This includes conditional expressions, function calls, casts
3853 and string constants. It unfortunately does not include symbols defined
3854 by preprocessor @code{#define} commands.
3855
3856 @ifclear CONLY
3857 Because C is so widespread, most of the expressions shown in examples in
3858 this manual are in C. @xref{Languages, , Using @value{GDBN} with Different
3859 Languages}, for information on how to use expressions in other
3860 languages.
3861
3862 In this section, we discuss operators that you can use in @value{GDBN}
3863 expressions regardless of your programming language.
3864
3865 Casts are supported in all languages, not just in C, because it is so
3866 useful to cast a number into a pointer so as to examine a structure
3867 at that address in memory.
3868 @c FIXME: casts supported---Mod2 true?
3869 @end ifclear
3870
3871 @value{GDBN} supports these operators in addition to those of programming
3872 languages:
3873
3874 @table @code
3875 @item @@
3876 @samp{@@} is a binary operator for treating parts of memory as arrays.
3877 @xref{Arrays, ,Artificial arrays}, for more information.
3878
3879 @item ::
3880 @samp{::} allows you to specify a variable in terms of the file or
3881 function where it is defined. @xref{Variables, ,Program variables}.
3882
3883 @item @{@var{type}@} @var{addr}
3884 @cindex @{@var{type}@}
3885 @cindex type casting memory
3886 @cindex memory, viewing as typed object
3887 @cindex casts, to view memory
3888 Refers to an object of type @var{type} stored at address @var{addr} in
3889 memory. @var{addr} may be any expression whose value is an integer or
3890 pointer (but parentheses are required around binary operators, just as in
3891 a cast). This construct is allowed regardless of what kind of data is
3892 normally supposed to reside at @var{addr}.
3893 @end table
3894
3895 @node Variables
3896 @section Program variables
3897
3898 The most common kind of expression to use is the name of a variable
3899 in your program.
3900
3901 Variables in expressions are understood in the selected stack frame
3902 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}); they must either be global
3903 (or static) or be visible according to the scope rules of the
3904 programming language from the point of execution in that frame. This
3905 means that in the function
3906
3907 @example
3908 foo (a)
3909 int a;
3910 @{
3911 bar (a);
3912 @{
3913 int b = test ();
3914 bar (b);
3915 @}
3916 @}
3917 @end example
3918
3919 @noindent
3920 you can examine and use the variable @code{a} whenever your program is
3921 executing within the function @code{foo}, but you can only use or
3922 examine the variable @code{b} while your program is executing inside
3923 the block where @code{b} is declared.
3924
3925 @cindex variable name conflict
3926 There is an exception: you can refer to a variable or function whose
3927 scope is a single source file even if the current execution point is not
3928 in this file. But it is possible to have more than one such variable or
3929 function with the same name (in different source files). If that
3930 happens, referring to that name has unpredictable effects. If you wish,
3931 you can specify a static variable in a particular function or file,
3932 using the colon-colon notation:
3933
3934 @cindex colon-colon
3935 @iftex
3936 @c info cannot cope with a :: index entry, but why deprive hard copy readers?
3937 @kindex ::
3938 @end iftex
3939 @example
3940 @var{file}::@var{variable}
3941 @var{function}::@var{variable}
3942 @end example
3943
3944 @noindent
3945 Here @var{file} or @var{function} is the name of the context for the
3946 static @var{variable}. In the case of file names, you can use quotes to
3947 make sure @value{GDBN} parses the file name as a single word---for example,
3948 to print a global value of @code{x} defined in @file{f2.c}:
3949
3950 @example
3951 (@value{GDBP}) p 'f2.c'::x
3952 @end example
3953
3954 @ifclear CONLY
3955 @cindex C++ scope resolution
3956 This use of @samp{::} is very rarely in conflict with the very similar
3957 use of the same notation in C++. @value{GDBN} also supports use of the C++
3958 scope resolution operator in @value{GDBN} expressions.
3959 @c FIXME: Um, so what happens in one of those rare cases where it's in
3960 @c conflict?? --mew
3961 @end ifclear
3962
3963 @cindex wrong values
3964 @cindex variable values, wrong
3965 @quotation
3966 @emph{Warning:} Occasionally, a local variable may appear to have the
3967 wrong value at certain points in a function---just after entry to a new
3968 scope, and just before exit.
3969 @end quotation
3970 You may see this problem when you are stepping by machine instructions.
3971 This is because on most machines, it takes more than one instruction to
3972 set up a stack frame (including local variable definitions); if you are
3973 stepping by machine instructions, variables may appear to have the wrong
3974 values until the stack frame is completely built. On exit, it usually
3975 also takes more than one machine instruction to destroy a stack frame;
3976 after you begin stepping through that group of instructions, local
3977 variable definitions may be gone.
3978
3979 @node Arrays
3980 @section Artificial arrays
3981
3982 @cindex artificial array
3983 @kindex @@
3984 It is often useful to print out several successive objects of the
3985 same type in memory; a section of an array, or an array of
3986 dynamically determined size for which only a pointer exists in the
3987 program.
3988
3989 You can do this by referring to a contiguous span of memory as an
3990 @dfn{artificial array}, using the binary operator @samp{@@}. The left
3991 operand of @samp{@@} should be the first element of the desired array,
3992 as an individual object. The right operand should be the desired length
3993 of the array. The result is an array value whose elements are all of
3994 the type of the left argument. The first element is actually the left
3995 argument; the second element comes from bytes of memory immediately
3996 following those that hold the first element, and so on. Here is an
3997 example. If a program says
3998
3999 @example
4000 int *array = (int *) malloc (len * sizeof (int));
4001 @end example
4002
4003 @noindent
4004 you can print the contents of @code{array} with
4005
4006 @example
4007 p *array@@len
4008 @end example
4009
4010 The left operand of @samp{@@} must reside in memory. Array values made
4011 with @samp{@@} in this way behave just like other arrays in terms of
4012 subscripting, and are coerced to pointers when used in expressions.
4013 Artificial arrays most often appear in expressions via the value history
4014 (@pxref{Value History, ,Value history}), after printing one out.
4015
4016 Sometimes the artificial array mechanism is not quite enough; in
4017 moderately complex data structures, the elements of interest may not
4018 actually be adjacent---for example, if you are interested in the values
4019 of pointers in an array. One useful work-around in this situation is
4020 to use a convenience variable (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
4021 variables}) as a counter in an expression that prints the first
4022 interesting value, and then repeat that expression via @key{RET}. For
4023 instance, suppose you have an array @code{dtab} of pointers to
4024 structures, and you are interested in the values of a field @code{fv}
4025 in each structure. Here is an example of what you might type:
4026
4027 @example
4028 set $i = 0
4029 p dtab[$i++]->fv
4030 @key{RET}
4031 @key{RET}
4032 @dots{}
4033 @end example
4034
4035 @node Output Formats
4036 @section Output formats
4037
4038 @cindex formatted output
4039 @cindex output formats
4040 By default, @value{GDBN} prints a value according to its data type. Sometimes
4041 this is not what you want. For example, you might want to print a number
4042 in hex, or a pointer in decimal. Or you might want to view data in memory
4043 at a certain address as a character string or as an instruction. To do
4044 these things, specify an @dfn{output format} when you print a value.
4045
4046 The simplest use of output formats is to say how to print a value
4047 already computed. This is done by starting the arguments of the
4048 @code{print} command with a slash and a format letter. The format
4049 letters supported are:
4050
4051 @table @code
4052 @item x
4053 Regard the bits of the value as an integer, and print the integer in
4054 hexadecimal.
4055
4056 @item d
4057 Print as integer in signed decimal.
4058
4059 @item u
4060 Print as integer in unsigned decimal.
4061
4062 @item o
4063 Print as integer in octal.
4064
4065 @item t
4066 Print as integer in binary. The letter @samp{t} stands for ``two''.
4067 @footnote{@samp{b} cannot be used because these format letters are also
4068 used with the @code{x} command, where @samp{b} stands for ``byte'';
4069 @pxref{Memory,,Examining memory}.}
4070
4071 @item a
4072 Print as an address, both absolute in hex and as an offset from the
4073 nearest preceding symbol. This format can be used to discover where (in
4074 what function) an unknown address is located:
4075
4076 @example
4077 (@value{GDBP}) p/a 0x54320
4078 $3 = 0x54320 <_initialize_vx+396>
4079 @end example
4080
4081 @item c
4082 Regard as an integer and print it as a character constant.
4083
4084 @item f
4085 Regard the bits of the value as a floating point number and print
4086 using typical floating point syntax.
4087 @end table
4088
4089 For example, to print the program counter in hex (@pxref{Registers}), type
4090
4091 @example
4092 p/x $pc
4093 @end example
4094
4095 @noindent
4096 Note that no space is required before the slash; this is because command
4097 names in @value{GDBN} cannot contain a slash.
4098
4099 To reprint the last value in the value history with a different format,
4100 you can use the @code{print} command with just a format and no
4101 expression. For example, @samp{p/x} reprints the last value in hex.
4102
4103 @node Memory
4104 @section Examining memory
4105
4106 You can use the command @code{x} (for ``examine'') to examine memory in
4107 any of several formats, independently of your program's data types.
4108
4109 @cindex examining memory
4110 @table @code
4111 @kindex x
4112 @item x/@var{nfu} @var{addr}
4113 @itemx x @var{addr}
4114 @itemx x
4115 Use the @code{x} command to examine memory.
4116 @end table
4117
4118 @var{n}, @var{f}, and @var{u} are all optional parameters that specify how
4119 much memory to display and how to format it; @var{addr} is an
4120 expression giving the address where you want to start displaying memory.
4121 If you use defaults for @var{nfu}, you need not type the slash @samp{/}.
4122 Several commands set convenient defaults for @var{addr}.
4123
4124 @table @r
4125 @item @var{n}, the repeat count
4126 The repeat count is a decimal integer; the default is 1. It specifies
4127 how much memory (counting by units @var{u}) to display.
4128 @c This really is **decimal**; unaffected by 'set radix' as of GDB
4129 @c 4.1.2.
4130
4131 @item @var{f}, the display format
4132 The display format is one of the formats used by @code{print},
4133 or @samp{s} (null-terminated string) or @samp{i} (machine instruction).
4134 The default is @samp{x} (hexadecimal) initially, or the format from the
4135 last time you used either @code{x} or @code{print}.
4136
4137 @item @var{u}, the unit size
4138 The unit size is any of
4139
4140 @table @code
4141 @item b
4142 Bytes.
4143 @item h
4144 Halfwords (two bytes).
4145 @item w
4146 Words (four bytes). This is the initial default.
4147 @item g
4148 Giant words (eight bytes).
4149 @end table
4150
4151 Each time you specify a unit size with @code{x}, that size becomes the
4152 default unit the next time you use @code{x}. (For the @samp{s} and
4153 @samp{i} formats, the unit size is ignored and is normally not written.)
4154
4155 @item @var{addr}, starting display address
4156 @var{addr} is the address where you want @value{GDBN} to begin displaying
4157 memory. The expression need not have a pointer value (though it may);
4158 it is always interpreted as an integer address of a byte of memory.
4159 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on expressions. The default for
4160 @var{addr} is usually just after the last address examined---but several
4161 other commands also set the default address: @code{info breakpoints} (to
4162 the address of the last breakpoint listed), @code{info line} (to the
4163 starting address of a line), and @code{print} (if you use it to display
4164 a value from memory).
4165 @end table
4166
4167 For example, @samp{x/3uh 0x54320} is a request to display three halfwords
4168 (@code{h}) of memory, formatted as unsigned decimal integers (@samp{u}),
4169 starting at address @code{0x54320}. @samp{x/4xw $sp} prints the four
4170 words (@samp{w}) of memory above the stack pointer (here, @samp{$sp};
4171 @pxref{Registers}) in hexadecimal (@samp{x}).
4172
4173 Since the letters indicating unit sizes are all distinct from the
4174 letters specifying output formats, you do not have to remember whether
4175 unit size or format comes first; either order will work. The output
4176 specifications @samp{4xw} and @samp{4wx} mean exactly the same thing.
4177 (However, the count @var{n} must come first; @samp{wx4} will not work.)
4178
4179 Even though the unit size @var{u} is ignored for the formats @samp{s}
4180 and @samp{i}, you might still want to use a count @var{n}; for example,
4181 @samp{3i} specifies that you want to see three machine instructions,
4182 including any operands. The command @code{disassemble} gives an
4183 alternative way of inspecting machine instructions; @pxref{Machine
4184 Code,,Source and machine code}.
4185
4186 All the defaults for the arguments to @code{x} are designed to make it
4187 easy to continue scanning memory with minimal specifications each time
4188 you use @code{x}. For example, after you have inspected three machine
4189 instructions with @samp{x/3i @var{addr}}, you can inspect the next seven
4190 with just @samp{x/7}. If you use @key{RET} to repeat the @code{x} command,
4191 the repeat count @var{n} is used again; the other arguments default as
4192 for successive uses of @code{x}.
4193
4194 @cindex @code{$_}, @code{$__}, and value history
4195 The addresses and contents printed by the @code{x} command are not saved
4196 in the value history because there is often too much of them and they
4197 would get in the way. Instead, @value{GDBN} makes these values available for
4198 subsequent use in expressions as values of the convenience variables
4199 @code{$_} and @code{$__}. After an @code{x} command, the last address
4200 examined is available for use in expressions in the convenience variable
4201 @code{$_}. The contents of that address, as examined, are available in
4202 the convenience variable @code{$__}.
4203
4204 If the @code{x} command has a repeat count, the address and contents saved
4205 are from the last memory unit printed; this is not the same as the last
4206 address printed if several units were printed on the last line of output.
4207
4208 @node Auto Display
4209 @section Automatic display
4210 @cindex automatic display
4211 @cindex display of expressions
4212
4213 If you find that you want to print the value of an expression frequently
4214 (to see how it changes), you might want to add it to the @dfn{automatic
4215 display list} so that @value{GDBN} will print its value each time your program stops.
4216 Each expression added to the list is given a number to identify it;
4217 to remove an expression from the list, you specify that number.
4218 The automatic display looks like this:
4219
4220 @example
4221 2: foo = 38
4222 3: bar[5] = (struct hack *) 0x3804
4223 @end example
4224
4225 @noindent
4226 This display shows item numbers, expressions and their current values. As with
4227 displays you request manually using @code{x} or @code{print}, you can
4228 specify the output format you prefer; in fact, @code{display} decides
4229 whether to use @code{print} or @code{x} depending on how elaborate your
4230 format specification is---it uses @code{x} if you specify a unit size,
4231 or one of the two formats (@samp{i} and @samp{s}) that are only
4232 supported by @code{x}; otherwise it uses @code{print}.
4233
4234 @table @code
4235 @item display @var{exp}
4236 @kindex display
4237 Add the expression @var{exp} to the list of expressions to display
4238 each time your program stops. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
4239
4240 @code{display} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
4241
4242 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{exp}
4243 For @var{fmt} specifying only a display format and not a size or
4244 count, add the expression @var{exp} to the auto-display list but
4245 arrange to display it each time in the specified format @var{fmt}.
4246 @xref{Output Formats,,Output formats}.
4247
4248 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{addr}
4249 For @var{fmt} @samp{i} or @samp{s}, or including a unit-size or a
4250 number of units, add the expression @var{addr} as a memory address to
4251 be examined each time your program stops. Examining means in effect
4252 doing @samp{x/@var{fmt} @var{addr}}. @xref{Memory, ,Examining memory}.
4253 @end table
4254
4255 For example, @samp{display/i $pc} can be helpful, to see the machine
4256 instruction about to be executed each time execution stops (@samp{$pc}
4257 is a common name for the program counter; @pxref{Registers}).
4258
4259 @table @code
4260 @item undisplay @var{dnums}@dots{}
4261 @itemx delete display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4262 @kindex delete display
4263 @kindex undisplay
4264 Remove item numbers @var{dnums} from the list of expressions to display.
4265
4266 @code{undisplay} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
4267 (Otherwise you would just get the error @samp{No display number @dots{}}.)
4268
4269 @item disable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4270 @kindex disable display
4271 Disable the display of item numbers @var{dnums}. A disabled display
4272 item is not printed automatically, but is not forgotten. It may be
4273 enabled again later.
4274
4275 @item enable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
4276 @kindex enable display
4277 Enable display of item numbers @var{dnums}. It becomes effective once
4278 again in auto display of its expression, until you specify otherwise.
4279
4280 @item display
4281 Display the current values of the expressions on the list, just as is
4282 done when your program stops.
4283
4284 @item info display
4285 @kindex info display
4286 Print the list of expressions previously set up to display
4287 automatically, each one with its item number, but without showing the
4288 values. This includes disabled expressions, which are marked as such.
4289 It also includes expressions which would not be displayed right now
4290 because they refer to automatic variables not currently available.
4291 @end table
4292
4293 If a display expression refers to local variables, then it does not make
4294 sense outside the lexical context for which it was set up. Such an
4295 expression is disabled when execution enters a context where one of its
4296 variables is not defined. For example, if you give the command
4297 @code{display last_char} while inside a function with an argument
4298 @code{last_char}, then this argument will be displayed while your program
4299 continues to stop inside that function. When it stops elsewhere---where
4300 there is no variable @code{last_char}---display is disabled. The next time
4301 your program stops where @code{last_char} is meaningful, you can enable the
4302 display expression once again.
4303
4304 @node Print Settings
4305 @section Print settings
4306
4307 @cindex format options
4308 @cindex print settings
4309 @value{GDBN} provides the following ways to control how arrays, structures,
4310 and symbols are printed.
4311
4312 @noindent
4313 These settings are useful for debugging programs in any language:
4314
4315 @table @code
4316 @item set print address
4317 @itemx set print address on
4318 @kindex set print address
4319 @value{GDBN} will print memory addresses showing the location of stack
4320 traces, structure values, pointer values, breakpoints, and so forth,
4321 even when it also displays the contents of those addresses. The default
4322 is on. For example, this is what a stack frame display looks like, with
4323 @code{set print address on}:
4324
4325 @smallexample
4326 @group
4327 (@value{GDBP}) f
4328 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<<", rq=0x34c88 ">>")
4329 at input.c:530
4330 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
4331 @end group
4332 @end smallexample
4333
4334 @item set print address off
4335 Do not print addresses when displaying their contents. For example,
4336 this is the same stack frame displayed with @code{set print address off}:
4337
4338 @smallexample
4339 @group
4340 (@value{GDBP}) set print addr off
4341 (@value{GDBP}) f
4342 #0 set_quotes (lq="<<", rq=">>") at input.c:530
4343 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
4344 @end group
4345 @end smallexample
4346
4347 You can use @samp{set print address off} to eliminate all machine
4348 dependent displays from the @value{GDBN} interface. For example, with
4349 @code{print address off}, you should get the same text for backtraces on
4350 all machines---whether or not they involve pointer arguments.
4351
4352 @item show print address
4353 @kindex show print address
4354 Show whether or not addresses are to be printed.
4355 @end table
4356
4357 When @value{GDBN} prints a symbolic address, it normally prints the
4358 closest earlier symbol plus an offset. If that symbol does not uniquely
4359 identify the address (for example, it is a name whose scope is a single
4360 source file), you may need to disambiguate. One way to do this is with
4361 @code{info line}, for example @code{info line *0x4537}. Alternately,
4362 you can set @value{GDBN} to print the source file and line number when
4363 it prints a symbolic address:
4364
4365 @table @code
4366 @item set print symbol-filename on
4367 @kindex set print symbol-filename
4368 Tell @value{GDBN} to print the source file name and line number of a
4369 symbol in the symbolic form of an address.
4370
4371 @item set print symbol-filename off
4372 Do not print source file name and line number of a symbol. This is the
4373 default.
4374
4375 @item show print symbol-filename
4376 @kindex show print symbol-filename
4377 Show whether or not @value{GDBN} will print the source file name and
4378 line number of a symbol in the symbolic form of an address.
4379 @end table
4380
4381 Another situation where it's helpful to show symbol filenames and line
4382 numbers is when disassembling code; @value{GDBN} will show you the line
4383 number and source file that corresponds to each instruction.
4384
4385 If you have a pointer and you aren't sure what object it points to,
4386 you can turn on printing of symbolic addresses and filenames, and
4387 determine the name and source file location of the variable which
4388 is being pointed to, using the @code{x/x @var{pointer}} command.
4389 This displays the memory location pointed to, and as a side effect,
4390 interprets the address in symbolic form.
4391
4392 Also, you may wish to see the symbolic form only if the address being
4393 printed is reasonably close to the closest earlier symbol:
4394
4395 @table @code
4396 @item set print max-symbolic-offset @var{max-offset}
4397 @kindex set print max-symbolic-offset
4398 Tell @value{GDBN} to only display the symbolic form of an address if the
4399 offset between the closest earlier symbol and the address is less than
4400 @var{max-offset}. The default is 0, which means to always print the
4401 symbolic form of an address, if any symbol precedes it.
4402
4403 @item show print max-symbolic-offset
4404 @kindex show print max-symbolic-offset
4405 Ask how large the maximum offset is that @value{GDBN} will print in a
4406 symbolic address.
4407 @end table
4408
4409 Sometimes @value{GDBN} can tell you more about an address if it does an
4410 extensive search of its symbol information. The default is to provide
4411 a quick symbolic display that is usually correct, but which may not give
4412 the most useful answer when working in some object file formats. If
4413 you aren't getting the information you need, try:
4414
4415 @table @code
4416 @item set print fast-symbolic-addr off
4417 @kindex set print fast-symbolic-addr
4418 Search all symbolic information when displaying an address symbolically.
4419 This setting may display more information about static variables, for
4420 example, but will take longer.
4421
4422 @item set print fast-symbolic-addr
4423 @item set print fast-symbolic-addr on
4424 Search only the ``minimal symbol information'' when displaying symbolic
4425 information about an address. This is the default.
4426
4427 @item show print fast-symbolic-addr
4428 @kindex show print fast-symbolic-addr
4429 Ask whether @value{GDBN} will use a fast or slow method of printing
4430 symbolic address.
4431 @end table
4432
4433 Other settings control how different kinds of objects are printed:
4434
4435 @table @code
4436 @item set print array
4437 @itemx set print array on
4438 @kindex set print array
4439 @value{GDBN} will pretty-print arrays. This format is more convenient to read,
4440 but uses more space. The default is off.
4441
4442 @item set print array off
4443 Return to compressed format for arrays.
4444
4445 @item show print array
4446 @kindex show print array
4447 Show whether compressed or pretty format is selected for displaying
4448 arrays.
4449
4450 @item set print elements @var{number-of-elements}
4451 @kindex set print elements
4452 If @value{GDBN} is printing a large array, it will stop printing after it has
4453 printed the number of elements set by the @code{set print elements} command.
4454 This limit also applies to the display of strings.
4455 Setting the number of elements to zero means that the printing is unlimited.
4456
4457 @item show print elements
4458 @kindex show print elements
4459 Display the number of elements of a large array that @value{GDBN} will print
4460 before losing patience.
4461
4462 @item set print pretty on
4463 @kindex set print pretty
4464 Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in an indented format with one member per
4465 line, like this:
4466
4467 @smallexample
4468 @group
4469 $1 = @{
4470 next = 0x0,
4471 flags = @{
4472 sweet = 1,
4473 sour = 1
4474 @},
4475 meat = 0x54 "Pork"
4476 @}
4477 @end group
4478 @end smallexample
4479
4480 @item set print pretty off
4481 Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in a compact format, like this:
4482
4483 @smallexample
4484 @group
4485 $1 = @{next = 0x0, flags = @{sweet = 1, sour = 1@}, \
4486 meat = 0x54 "Pork"@}
4487 @end group
4488 @end smallexample
4489
4490 @noindent
4491 This is the default format.
4492
4493 @item show print pretty
4494 @kindex show print pretty
4495 Show which format @value{GDBN} will use to print structures.
4496
4497 @item set print sevenbit-strings on
4498 @kindex set print sevenbit-strings
4499 Print using only seven-bit characters; if this option is set,
4500 @value{GDBN} will display any eight-bit characters (in strings or character
4501 values) using the notation @code{\}@var{nnn}. This setting is best when
4502 working in English (ASCII) and the high-order bit of characters is used
4503 as a marker or ``meta'' bit.
4504
4505 @item set print sevenbit-strings off
4506 Print full eight-bit characters. This
4507 allows the use of full international character sets, and is the default.
4508
4509 @item show print sevenbit-strings
4510 @kindex show print sevenbit-strings
4511 Show whether or not @value{GDBN} will print only seven-bit characters.
4512
4513 @item set print union on
4514 @kindex set print union
4515 Tell @value{GDBN} to print unions which are contained in structures. This is the
4516 default setting.
4517
4518 @item set print union off
4519 Tell @value{GDBN} not to print unions which are contained in structures.
4520
4521 @item show print union
4522 @kindex show print union
4523 Ask @value{GDBN} whether or not it will print unions which are contained in
4524 structures.
4525
4526 For example, given the declarations
4527
4528 @smallexample
4529 typedef enum @{Tree, Bug@} Species;
4530 typedef enum @{Big_tree, Acorn, Seedling@} Tree_forms;
4531 typedef enum @{Caterpillar, Cocoon, Butterfly@}
4532 Bug_forms;
4533
4534 struct thing @{
4535 Species it;
4536 union @{
4537 Tree_forms tree;
4538 Bug_forms bug;
4539 @} form;
4540 @};
4541
4542 struct thing foo = @{Tree, @{Acorn@}@};
4543 @end smallexample
4544
4545 @noindent
4546 with @code{set print union on} in effect @samp{p foo} would print
4547
4548 @smallexample
4549 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{tree = Acorn, bug = Cocoon@}@}
4550 @end smallexample
4551
4552 @noindent
4553 and with @code{set print union off} in effect it would print
4554
4555 @smallexample
4556 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{...@}@}
4557 @end smallexample
4558 @end table
4559
4560 @ifclear CONLY
4561 @need 1000
4562 @noindent
4563 These settings are of interest when debugging C++ programs:
4564
4565 @table @code
4566 @item set print demangle
4567 @itemx set print demangle on
4568 @kindex set print demangle
4569 Print C++ names in their source form rather than in the encoded
4570 (``mangled'') form passed to the assembler and linker for type-safe
4571 linkage. The default is @samp{on}.
4572
4573 @item show print demangle
4574 @kindex show print demangle
4575 Show whether C++ names will be printed in mangled or demangled form.
4576
4577 @item set print asm-demangle
4578 @itemx set print asm-demangle on
4579 @kindex set print asm-demangle
4580 Print C++ names in their source form rather than their mangled form, even
4581 in assembler code printouts such as instruction disassemblies.
4582 The default is off.
4583
4584 @item show print asm-demangle
4585 @kindex show print asm-demangle
4586 Show whether C++ names in assembly listings will be printed in mangled
4587 or demangled form.
4588
4589 @item set demangle-style @var{style}
4590 @kindex set demangle-style
4591 @cindex C++ symbol decoding style
4592 @cindex symbol decoding style, C++
4593 Choose among several encoding schemes used by different compilers to
4594 represent C++ names. The choices for @var{style} are currently:
4595
4596 @table @code
4597 @item auto
4598 Allow @value{GDBN} to choose a decoding style by inspecting your program.
4599
4600 @item gnu
4601 Decode based on the GNU C++ compiler (@code{g++}) encoding algorithm.
4602
4603 @item lucid
4604 Decode based on the Lucid C++ compiler (@code{lcc}) encoding algorithm.
4605
4606 @item arm
4607 Decode using the algorithm in the @cite{C++ Annotated Reference Manual}.
4608 @strong{Warning:} this setting alone is not sufficient to allow
4609 debugging @code{cfront}-generated executables. @value{GDBN} would
4610 require further enhancement to permit that.
4611 @end table
4612
4613 @item show demangle-style
4614 @kindex show demangle-style
4615 Display the encoding style currently in use for decoding C++ symbols.
4616
4617 @item set print object
4618 @itemx set print object on
4619 @kindex set print object
4620 When displaying a pointer to an object, identify the @emph{actual}
4621 (derived) type of the object rather than the @emph{declared} type, using
4622 the virtual function table.
4623
4624 @item set print object off
4625 Display only the declared type of objects, without reference to the
4626 virtual function table. This is the default setting.
4627
4628 @item show print object
4629 @kindex show print object
4630 Show whether actual, or declared, object types will be displayed.
4631
4632 @item set print vtbl
4633 @itemx set print vtbl on
4634 @kindex set print vtbl
4635 Pretty print C++ virtual function tables. The default is off.
4636
4637 @item set print vtbl off
4638 Do not pretty print C++ virtual function tables.
4639
4640 @item show print vtbl
4641 @kindex show print vtbl
4642 Show whether C++ virtual function tables are pretty printed, or not.
4643 @end table
4644 @end ifclear
4645
4646 @node Value History
4647 @section Value history
4648
4649 @cindex value history
4650 Values printed by the @code{print} command are saved in the @value{GDBN} @dfn{value
4651 history} so that you can refer to them in other expressions. Values are
4652 kept until the symbol table is re-read or discarded (for example with
4653 the @code{file} or @code{symbol-file} commands). When the symbol table
4654 changes, the value history is discarded, since the values may contain
4655 pointers back to the types defined in the symbol table.
4656
4657 @cindex @code{$}
4658 @cindex @code{$$}
4659 @cindex history number
4660 The values printed are given @dfn{history numbers} by which you can
4661 refer to them. These are successive integers starting with one.
4662 @code{print} shows you the history number assigned to a value by
4663 printing @samp{$@var{num} = } before the value; here @var{num} is the
4664 history number.
4665
4666 To refer to any previous value, use @samp{$} followed by the value's
4667 history number. The way @code{print} labels its output is designed to
4668 remind you of this. Just @code{$} refers to the most recent value in
4669 the history, and @code{$$} refers to the value before that.
4670 @code{$$@var{n}} refers to the @var{n}th value from the end; @code{$$2}
4671 is the value just prior to @code{$$}, @code{$$1} is equivalent to
4672 @code{$$}, and @code{$$0} is equivalent to @code{$}.
4673
4674 For example, suppose you have just printed a pointer to a structure and
4675 want to see the contents of the structure. It suffices to type
4676
4677 @example
4678 p *$
4679 @end example
4680
4681 If you have a chain of structures where the component @code{next} points
4682 to the next one, you can print the contents of the next one with this:
4683
4684 @example
4685 p *$.next
4686 @end example
4687
4688 @noindent
4689 You can print successive links in the chain by repeating this
4690 command---which you can do by just typing @key{RET}.
4691
4692 Note that the history records values, not expressions. If the value of
4693 @code{x} is 4 and you type these commands:
4694
4695 @example
4696 print x
4697 set x=5
4698 @end example
4699
4700 @noindent
4701 then the value recorded in the value history by the @code{print} command
4702 remains 4 even though the value of @code{x} has changed.
4703
4704 @table @code
4705 @kindex show values
4706 @item show values
4707 Print the last ten values in the value history, with their item numbers.
4708 This is like @samp{p@ $$9} repeated ten times, except that @code{show
4709 values} does not change the history.
4710
4711 @item show values @var{n}
4712 Print ten history values centered on history item number @var{n}.
4713
4714 @item show values +
4715 Print ten history values just after the values last printed. If no more
4716 values are available, produces no display.
4717 @end table
4718
4719 Pressing @key{RET} to repeat @code{show values @var{n}} has exactly the
4720 same effect as @samp{show values +}.
4721
4722 @node Convenience Vars
4723 @section Convenience variables
4724
4725 @cindex convenience variables
4726 @value{GDBN} provides @dfn{convenience variables} that you can use within
4727 @value{GDBN} to hold on to a value and refer to it later. These variables
4728 exist entirely within @value{GDBN}; they are not part of your program, and
4729 setting a convenience variable has no direct effect on further execution
4730 of your program. That is why you can use them freely.
4731
4732 Convenience variables are prefixed with @samp{$}. Any name preceded by
4733 @samp{$} can be used for a convenience variable, unless it is one of
4734 the predefined machine-specific register names (@pxref{Registers}).
4735 (Value history references, in contrast, are @emph{numbers} preceded
4736 by @samp{$}. @xref{Value History, ,Value history}.)
4737
4738 You can save a value in a convenience variable with an assignment
4739 expression, just as you would set a variable in your program.
4740 For example:
4741
4742 @example
4743 set $foo = *object_ptr
4744 @end example
4745
4746 @noindent
4747 would save in @code{$foo} the value contained in the object pointed to by
4748 @code{object_ptr}.
4749
4750 Using a convenience variable for the first time creates it, but its
4751 value is @code{void} until you assign a new value. You can alter the
4752 value with another assignment at any time.
4753
4754 Convenience variables have no fixed types. You can assign a convenience
4755 variable any type of value, including structures and arrays, even if
4756 that variable already has a value of a different type. The convenience
4757 variable, when used as an expression, has the type of its current value.
4758
4759 @table @code
4760 @item show convenience
4761 @kindex show convenience
4762 Print a list of convenience variables used so far, and their values.
4763 Abbreviated @code{show con}.
4764 @end table
4765
4766 One of the ways to use a convenience variable is as a counter to be
4767 incremented or a pointer to be advanced. For example, to print
4768 a field from successive elements of an array of structures:
4769
4770 @example
4771 set $i = 0
4772 print bar[$i++]->contents
4773 @i{@dots{} repeat that command by typing @key{RET}.}
4774 @end example
4775
4776 Some convenience variables are created automatically by @value{GDBN} and given
4777 values likely to be useful.
4778
4779 @table @code
4780 @item $_
4781 @kindex $_
4782 The variable @code{$_} is automatically set by the @code{x} command to
4783 the last address examined (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}). Other
4784 commands which provide a default address for @code{x} to examine also
4785 set @code{$_} to that address; these commands include @code{info line}
4786 and @code{info breakpoint}. The type of @code{$_} is @code{void *}
4787 except when set by the @code{x} command, in which case it is a pointer
4788 to the type of @code{$__}.
4789
4790 @item $__
4791 @kindex $__
4792 The variable @code{$__} is automatically set by the @code{x} command
4793 to the value found in the last address examined. Its type is chosen
4794 to match the format in which the data was printed.
4795 @end table
4796
4797 @node Registers
4798 @section Registers
4799
4800 @cindex registers
4801 You can refer to machine register contents, in expressions, as variables
4802 with names starting with @samp{$}. The names of registers are different
4803 for each machine; use @code{info registers} to see the names used on
4804 your machine.
4805
4806 @table @code
4807 @item info registers
4808 @kindex info registers
4809 Print the names and values of all registers except floating-point
4810 registers (in the selected stack frame).
4811
4812 @item info all-registers
4813 @kindex info all-registers
4814 @cindex floating point registers
4815 Print the names and values of all registers, including floating-point
4816 registers.
4817
4818 @item info registers @var{regname} @dots{}
4819 Print the relativized value of each specified register @var{regname}.
4820 @var{regname} may be any register name valid on the machine you are using, with
4821 or without the initial @samp{$}.
4822 @end table
4823
4824 @value{GDBN} has four ``standard'' register names that are available (in
4825 expressions) on most machines---whenever they do not conflict with an
4826 architecture's canonical mnemonics for registers. The register names
4827 @code{$pc} and @code{$sp} are used for the program counter register and
4828 the stack pointer. @code{$fp} is used for a register that contains a
4829 pointer to the current stack frame, and @code{$ps} is used for a
4830 register that contains the processor status. For example,
4831 you could print the program counter in hex with
4832
4833 @example
4834 p/x $pc
4835 @end example
4836
4837 @noindent
4838 or print the instruction to be executed next with
4839
4840 @example
4841 x/i $pc
4842 @end example
4843
4844 @noindent
4845 or add four to the stack pointer@footnote{This is a way of removing
4846 one word from the stack, on machines where stacks grow downward in
4847 memory (most machines, nowadays). This assumes that the innermost
4848 stack frame is selected; setting @code{$sp} is not allowed when other
4849 stack frames are selected. To pop entire frames off the stack,
4850 regardless of machine architecture, use @code{return};
4851 @pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a function}.} with
4852
4853 @example
4854 set $sp += 4
4855 @end example
4856
4857 Whenever possible, these four standard register names are available on
4858 your machine even though the machine has different canonical mnemonics,
4859 so long as there is no conflict. The @code{info registers} command
4860 shows the canonical names. For example, on the SPARC, @code{info
4861 registers} displays the processor status register as @code{$psr} but you
4862 can also refer to it as @code{$ps}.
4863
4864 @value{GDBN} always considers the contents of an ordinary register as an
4865 integer when the register is examined in this way. Some machines have
4866 special registers which can hold nothing but floating point; these
4867 registers are considered to have floating point values. There is no way
4868 to refer to the contents of an ordinary register as floating point value
4869 (although you can @emph{print} it as a floating point value with
4870 @samp{print/f $@var{regname}}).
4871
4872 Some registers have distinct ``raw'' and ``virtual'' data formats. This
4873 means that the data format in which the register contents are saved by
4874 the operating system is not the same one that your program normally
4875 sees. For example, the registers of the 68881 floating point
4876 coprocessor are always saved in ``extended'' (raw) format, but all C
4877 programs expect to work with ``double'' (virtual) format. In such
4878 cases, @value{GDBN} normally works with the virtual format only (the format that
4879 makes sense for your program), but the @code{info registers} command
4880 prints the data in both formats.
4881
4882 Normally, register values are relative to the selected stack frame
4883 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}). This means that you get the
4884 value that the register would contain if all stack frames farther in
4885 were exited and their saved registers restored. In order to see the
4886 true contents of hardware registers, you must select the innermost
4887 frame (with @samp{frame 0}).
4888
4889 However, @value{GDBN} must deduce where registers are saved, from the machine
4890 code generated by your compiler. If some registers are not saved, or if
4891 @value{GDBN} is unable to locate the saved registers, the selected stack
4892 frame will make no difference.
4893
4894 @ifset AMD29K
4895 @table @code
4896 @item set rstack_high_address @var{address}
4897 @kindex set rstack_high_address
4898 @cindex AMD 29K register stack
4899 @cindex register stack, AMD29K
4900 On AMD 29000 family processors, registers are saved in a separate
4901 ``register stack''. There is no way for @value{GDBN} to determine the extent
4902 of this stack. Normally, @value{GDBN} just assumes that the stack is ``large
4903 enough''. This may result in @value{GDBN} referencing memory locations that
4904 do not exist. If necessary, you can get around this problem by
4905 specifying the ending address of the register stack with the @code{set
4906 rstack_high_address} command. The argument should be an address, which
4907 you will probably want to precede with @samp{0x} to specify in
4908 hexadecimal.
4909
4910 @item show rstack_high_address
4911 @kindex show rstack_high_address
4912 Display the current limit of the register stack, on AMD 29000 family
4913 processors.
4914 @end table
4915 @end ifset
4916
4917 @ifclear HAVE-FLOAT
4918 @node Floating Point Hardware
4919 @section Floating point hardware
4920 @cindex floating point
4921
4922 @c FIXME! Really host, not target?
4923 Depending on the host machine architecture, @value{GDBN} may be able to give
4924 you more information about the status of the floating point hardware.
4925
4926 @table @code
4927 @item info float
4928 @kindex info float
4929 Display hardware-dependent information about the floating
4930 point unit. The exact contents and layout vary depending on the
4931 floating point chip; on some platforms, @samp{info float} is not
4932 available at all.
4933 @end table
4934 @c FIXME: this is a cop-out. Try to get examples, explanations. Only
4935 @c FIXME...supported currently on arm's and 386's. Mark properly with
4936 @c FIXME... m4 macros to isolate general statements from hardware-dep,
4937 @c FIXME... at that point.
4938 @end ifclear
4939
4940 @ifclear CONLY
4941 @node Languages
4942 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages
4943 @cindex languages
4944
4945 @ifset MOD2
4946 Although programming languages generally have common aspects, they are
4947 rarely expressed in the same manner. For instance, in ANSI C,
4948 dereferencing a pointer @code{p} is accomplished by @code{*p}, but in
4949 Modula-2, it is accomplished by @code{p^}. Values can also be
4950 represented (and displayed) differently. Hex numbers in C are written
4951 like @samp{0x1ae}, while in Modula-2 they appear as @samp{1AEH}.
4952 @end ifset
4953
4954 @cindex working language
4955 Language-specific information is built into @value{GDBN} for some languages,
4956 allowing you to express operations like the above in your program's
4957 native language, and allowing @value{GDBN} to output values in a manner
4958 consistent with the syntax of your program's native language. The
4959 language you use to build expressions, called the @dfn{working
4960 language}, can be selected manually, or @value{GDBN} can set it
4961 automatically.
4962
4963 @menu
4964 * Setting:: Switching between source languages
4965 * Show:: Displaying the language
4966 @ifset MOD2
4967 * Checks:: Type and range checks
4968 @end ifset
4969
4970 * Support:: Supported languages
4971 @end menu
4972
4973 @node Setting
4974 @section Switching between source languages
4975
4976 There are two ways to control the working language---either have @value{GDBN}
4977 set it automatically, or select it manually yourself. You can use the
4978 @code{set language} command for either purpose. On startup, @value{GDBN}
4979 defaults to setting the language automatically.
4980
4981 @menu
4982 * Manually:: Setting the working language manually
4983 * Automatically:: Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
4984 @end menu
4985
4986 @node Manually
4987 @subsection Setting the working language
4988
4989 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically,
4990 expressions are interpreted the same way in your debugging session and
4991 your program.
4992
4993 @kindex set language
4994 If you wish, you may set the language manually. To do this, issue the
4995 command @samp{set language @var{lang}}, where @var{lang} is the name of
4996 a language, such as
4997 @ifclear MOD2
4998 @code{c}.
4999 @end ifclear
5000 @ifset MOD2
5001 @code{c} or @code{modula-2}.
5002 @end ifset
5003 For a list of the supported languages, type @samp{set language}.
5004 @c FIXME: rms: eventually this command should be "help set language".
5005
5006 @ifset MOD2
5007 Setting the language manually prevents @value{GDBN} from updating the working
5008 language automatically. This can lead to confusion if you try
5009 to debug a program when the working language is not the same as the
5010 source language, when an expression is acceptable to both
5011 languages---but means different things. For instance, if the current
5012 source file were written in C, and @value{GDBN} was parsing Modula-2, a
5013 command such as:
5014
5015 @example
5016 print a = b + c
5017 @end example
5018
5019 @noindent
5020 might not have the effect you intended. In C, this means to add
5021 @code{b} and @code{c} and place the result in @code{a}. The result
5022 printed would be the value of @code{a}. In Modula-2, this means to compare
5023 @code{a} to the result of @code{b+c}, yielding a @code{BOOLEAN} value.
5024 @end ifset
5025
5026 @node Automatically
5027 @subsection Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
5028
5029 To have @value{GDBN} set the working language automatically, use @samp{set
5030 language local} or @samp{set language auto}. @value{GDBN} then infers the
5031 language that a program was written in by looking at the name of its
5032 source files, and examining their extensions:
5033
5034 @table @file
5035 @ifset MOD2
5036 @item *.mod
5037 Modula-2 source file
5038 @end ifset
5039
5040 @item *.c
5041 C source file
5042
5043 @item *.C
5044 @itemx *.cc
5045 C++ source file
5046 @end table
5047
5048 This information is recorded for each function or procedure in a source
5049 file. When your program stops in a frame (usually by encountering a
5050 breakpoint), @value{GDBN} sets the working language to the language recorded
5051 for the function in that frame. If the language for a frame is unknown
5052 (that is, if the function or block corresponding to the frame was
5053 defined in a source file that does not have a recognized extension), the
5054 current working language is not changed, and @value{GDBN} issues a warning.
5055
5056 This may not seem necessary for most programs, which are written
5057 entirely in one source language. However, program modules and libraries
5058 written in one source language can be used by a main program written in
5059 a different source language. Using @samp{set language auto} in this
5060 case frees you from having to set the working language manually.
5061
5062 @node Show
5063 @section Displaying the language
5064
5065 The following commands will help you find out which language is the
5066 working language, and also what language source files were written in.
5067
5068 @kindex show language
5069 @kindex info frame
5070 @kindex info source
5071 @table @code
5072 @item show language
5073 Display the current working language. This is the
5074 language you can use with commands such as @code{print} to
5075 build and compute expressions that may involve variables in your program.
5076
5077 @item info frame
5078 Among the other information listed here (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information
5079 about a frame}) is the source language for this frame. This is the
5080 language that will become the working language if you ever use an
5081 identifier that is in this frame.
5082
5083 @item info source
5084 Among the other information listed here (@pxref{Symbols, ,Examining the
5085 Symbol Table}) is the source language of this source file.
5086 @end table
5087
5088 @ifset MOD2
5089 @node Checks
5090 @section Type and range checking
5091
5092 @quotation
5093 @emph{Warning:} In this release, the @value{GDBN} commands for type and range
5094 checking are included, but they do not yet have any effect. This
5095 section documents the intended facilities.
5096 @end quotation
5097 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range code added
5098
5099 Some languages are designed to guard you against making seemingly common
5100 errors through a series of compile- and run-time checks. These include
5101 checking the type of arguments to functions and operators, and making
5102 sure mathematical overflows are caught at run time. Checks such as
5103 these help to ensure a program's correctness once it has been compiled
5104 by eliminating type mismatches, and providing active checks for range
5105 errors when your program is running.
5106
5107 @value{GDBN} can check for conditions like the above if you wish.
5108 Although @value{GDBN} will not check the statements in your program, it
5109 can check expressions entered directly into @value{GDBN} for evaluation via
5110 the @code{print} command, for example. As with the working language,
5111 @value{GDBN} can also decide whether or not to check automatically based on
5112 your program's source language. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages},
5113 for the default settings of supported languages.
5114
5115 @menu
5116 * Type Checking:: An overview of type checking
5117 * Range Checking:: An overview of range checking
5118 @end menu
5119
5120 @cindex type checking
5121 @cindex checks, type
5122 @node Type Checking
5123 @subsection An overview of type checking
5124
5125 Some languages, such as Modula-2, are strongly typed, meaning that the
5126 arguments to operators and functions have to be of the correct type,
5127 otherwise an error occurs. These checks prevent type mismatch
5128 errors from ever causing any run-time problems. For example,
5129
5130 @example
5131 1 + 2 @result{} 3
5132 @exdent but
5133 @error{} 1 + 2.3
5134 @end example
5135
5136 The second example fails because the @code{CARDINAL} 1 is not
5137 type-compatible with the @code{REAL} 2.3.
5138
5139 For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell the @value{GDBN}
5140 type checker to skip checking; to treat any mismatches as errors and
5141 abandon the expression; or only issue warnings when type mismatches
5142 occur, but evaluate the expression anyway. When you choose the last of
5143 these, @value{GDBN} evaluates expressions like the second example above, but
5144 also issues a warning.
5145
5146 Even though you may turn type checking off, other type-based reasons may
5147 prevent @value{GDBN} from evaluating an expression. For instance, @value{GDBN} does not
5148 know how to add an @code{int} and a @code{struct foo}. These particular
5149 type errors have nothing to do with the language in use, and usually
5150 arise from expressions, such as the one described above, which make
5151 little sense to evaluate anyway.
5152
5153 Each language defines to what degree it is strict about type. For
5154 instance, both Modula-2 and C require the arguments to arithmetical
5155 operators to be numbers. In C, enumerated types and pointers can be
5156 represented as numbers, so that they are valid arguments to mathematical
5157 operators. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for further
5158 details on specific languages.
5159
5160 @value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the type checker:
5161
5162 @kindex set check
5163 @kindex set check type
5164 @kindex show check type
5165 @table @code
5166 @item set check type auto
5167 Set type checking on or off based on the current working language.
5168 @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
5169 each language.
5170
5171 @item set check type on
5172 @itemx set check type off
5173 Set type checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
5174 current working language. Issue a warning if the setting does not
5175 match the language default. If any type mismatches occur in
5176 evaluating an expression while typechecking is on, @value{GDBN} prints a
5177 message and aborts evaluation of the expression.
5178
5179 @item set check type warn
5180 Cause the type checker to issue warnings, but to always attempt to
5181 evaluate the expression. Evaluating the expression may still
5182 be impossible for other reasons. For example, @value{GDBN} cannot add
5183 numbers and structures.
5184
5185 @item show type
5186 Show the current setting of the type checker, and whether or not @value{GDBN} is
5187 setting it automatically.
5188 @end table
5189
5190 @cindex range checking
5191 @cindex checks, range
5192 @node Range Checking
5193 @subsection An overview of range checking
5194
5195 In some languages (such as Modula-2), it is an error to exceed the
5196 bounds of a type; this is enforced with run-time checks. Such range
5197 checking is meant to ensure program correctness by making sure
5198 computations do not overflow, or indices on an array element access do
5199 not exceed the bounds of the array.
5200
5201 For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell
5202 @value{GDBN} to treat range errors in one of three ways: ignore them,
5203 always treat them as errors and abandon the expression, or issue
5204 warnings but evaluate the expression anyway.
5205
5206 A range error can result from numerical overflow, from exceeding an
5207 array index bound, or when you type a constant that is not a member
5208 of any type. Some languages, however, do not treat overflows as an
5209 error. In many implementations of C, mathematical overflow causes the
5210 result to ``wrap around'' to lower values---for example, if @var{m} is
5211 the largest integer value, and @var{s} is the smallest, then
5212
5213 @example
5214 @var{m} + 1 @result{} @var{s}
5215 @end example
5216
5217 This, too, is specific to individual languages, and in some cases
5218 specific to individual compilers or machines. @xref{Support, ,
5219 Supported languages}, for further details on specific languages.
5220
5221 @value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the range checker:
5222
5223 @kindex set check
5224 @kindex set check range
5225 @kindex show check range
5226 @table @code
5227 @item set check range auto
5228 Set range checking on or off based on the current working language.
5229 @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
5230 each language.
5231
5232 @item set check range on
5233 @itemx set check range off
5234 Set range checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
5235 current working language. A warning is issued if the setting does not
5236 match the language default. If a range error occurs, then a message
5237 is printed and evaluation of the expression is aborted.
5238
5239 @item set check range warn
5240 Output messages when the @value{GDBN} range checker detects a range error,
5241 but attempt to evaluate the expression anyway. Evaluating the
5242 expression may still be impossible for other reasons, such as accessing
5243 memory that the process does not own (a typical example from many Unix
5244 systems).
5245
5246 @item show range
5247 Show the current setting of the range checker, and whether or not it is
5248 being set automatically by @value{GDBN}.
5249 @end table
5250 @end ifset
5251
5252 @node Support
5253 @section Supported languages
5254
5255 @ifset MOD2
5256 @value{GDBN} 4 supports C, C++, and Modula-2.
5257 @end ifset
5258 @ifclear MOD2
5259 @value{GDBN} 4 supports C, and C++.
5260 @end ifclear
5261 Some @value{GDBN} features may be used in expressions regardless of the
5262 language you use: the @value{GDBN} @code{@@} and @code{::} operators,
5263 and the @samp{@{type@}addr} construct (@pxref{Expressions,
5264 ,Expressions}) can be used with the constructs of any supported
5265 language.
5266
5267 The following sections detail to what degree each source language is
5268 supported by @value{GDBN}. These sections are not meant to be language
5269 tutorials or references, but serve only as a reference guide to what the
5270 @value{GDBN} expression parser will accept, and what input and output
5271 formats should look like for different languages. There are many good
5272 books written on each of these languages; please look to these for a
5273 language reference or tutorial.
5274
5275 @ifset MOD2
5276 @menu
5277 * C:: C and C++
5278 * Modula-2:: Modula-2
5279 @end menu
5280
5281 @node C
5282 @subsection C and C++
5283 @cindex C and C++
5284 @cindex expressions in C or C++
5285
5286 Since C and C++ are so closely related, many features of @value{GDBN} apply
5287 to both languages. Whenever this is the case, we discuss both languages
5288 together.
5289 @end ifset
5290 @ifclear MOD2
5291 @c Cancel this below, under same condition, at end of this chapter!
5292 @raisesections
5293 @end ifclear
5294
5295 @cindex C++
5296 @kindex g++
5297 @cindex GNU C++
5298 The C++ debugging facilities are jointly implemented by the GNU C++
5299 compiler and @value{GDBN}. Therefore, to debug your C++ code
5300 effectively, you must compile your C++ programs with the GNU C++
5301 compiler, @code{g++}.
5302
5303 For best results when debugging C++ programs, use the stabs debugging
5304 format. You can select that format explicitly with the @code{g++}
5305 command-line options @samp{-gstabs} or @samp{-gstabs+}. See
5306 @ref{Debugging Options,,Options for Debugging Your Program or GNU CC,
5307 gcc.info, Using GNU CC}, for more information.
5308 @end ifclear
5309 @ifset CONLY
5310 @node C
5311 @chapter C Language Support
5312 @cindex C language
5313 @cindex expressions in C
5314
5315 Information specific to the C language is built into @value{GDBN} so that you
5316 can use C expressions while degugging. This also permits @value{GDBN} to
5317 output values in a manner consistent with C conventions.
5318
5319 @menu
5320 * C Operators:: C operators
5321 * C Constants:: C constants
5322 * Debugging C:: @value{GDBN} and C
5323 @end menu
5324 @end ifset
5325 @ifclear CONLY
5326 @menu
5327 * C Operators:: C and C++ operators
5328 * C Constants:: C and C++ constants
5329 * Cplus expressions:: C++ expressions
5330 * C Defaults:: Default settings for C and C++
5331 @ifset MOD2
5332 * C Checks:: C and C++ type and range checks
5333 @end ifset
5334
5335 * Debugging C:: @value{GDBN} and C
5336 * Debugging C plus plus:: Special features for C++
5337 @end menu
5338 @end ifclear
5339
5340 @ifclear CONLY
5341 @cindex C and C++ operators
5342 @node C Operators
5343 @subsubsection C and C++ operators
5344 @end ifclear
5345 @ifset CONLY
5346 @cindex C operators
5347 @node C Operators
5348 @section C operators
5349 @end ifset
5350
5351 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
5352 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
5353 often defined on groups of types.
5354
5355 @ifclear CONLY
5356 For the purposes of C and C++, the following definitions hold:
5357 @end ifclear
5358
5359 @itemize @bullet
5360 @item
5361 @emph{Integral types} include @code{int} with any of its storage-class
5362 specifiers; @code{char}; and @code{enum}.
5363
5364 @item
5365 @emph{Floating-point types} include @code{float} and @code{double}.
5366
5367 @item
5368 @emph{Pointer types} include all types defined as @code{(@var{type}
5369 *)}.
5370
5371 @item
5372 @emph{Scalar types} include all of the above.
5373 @end itemize
5374
5375 @noindent
5376 The following operators are supported. They are listed here
5377 in order of increasing precedence:
5378
5379 @table @code
5380 @item ,
5381 The comma or sequencing operator. Expressions in a comma-separated list
5382 are evaluated from left to right, with the result of the entire
5383 expression being the last expression evaluated.
5384
5385 @item =
5386 Assignment. The value of an assignment expression is the value
5387 assigned. Defined on scalar types.
5388
5389 @item @var{op}=
5390 Used in an expression of the form @w{@code{@var{a} @var{op}= @var{b}}},
5391 and translated to @w{@code{@var{a} = @var{a op b}}}.
5392 @w{@code{@var{op}=}} and @code{=} have the same precendence.
5393 @var{op} is any one of the operators @code{|}, @code{^}, @code{&},
5394 @code{<<}, @code{>>}, @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{%}.
5395
5396 @item ?:
5397 The ternary operator. @code{@var{a} ? @var{b} : @var{c}} can be thought
5398 of as: if @var{a} then @var{b} else @var{c}. @var{a} should be of an
5399 integral type.
5400
5401 @item ||
5402 Logical @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5403
5404 @item &&
5405 Logical @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
5406
5407 @item |
5408 Bitwise @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5409
5410 @item ^
5411 Bitwise exclusive-@sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
5412
5413 @item &
5414 Bitwise @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
5415
5416 @item ==@r{, }!=
5417 Equality and inequality. Defined on scalar types. The value of these
5418 expressions is 0 for false and non-zero for true.
5419
5420 @item <@r{, }>@r{, }<=@r{, }>=
5421 Less than, greater than, less than or equal, greater than or equal.
5422 Defined on scalar types. The value of these expressions is 0 for false
5423 and non-zero for true.
5424
5425 @item <<@r{, }>>
5426 left shift, and right shift. Defined on integral types.
5427
5428 @item @@
5429 The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
5430
5431 @item +@r{, }-
5432 Addition and subtraction. Defined on integral types, floating-point types and
5433 pointer types.
5434
5435 @item *@r{, }/@r{, }%
5436 Multiplication, division, and modulus. Multiplication and division are
5437 defined on integral and floating-point types. Modulus is defined on
5438 integral types.
5439
5440 @item ++@r{, }--
5441 Increment and decrement. When appearing before a variable, the
5442 operation is performed before the variable is used in an expression;
5443 when appearing after it, the variable's value is used before the
5444 operation takes place.
5445
5446 @item *
5447 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types. Same precedence as
5448 @code{++}.
5449
5450 @item &
5451 Address operator. Defined on variables. Same precedence as @code{++}.
5452
5453 @ifclear CONLY
5454 For debugging C++, @value{GDBN} implements a use of @samp{&} beyond what is
5455 allowed in the C++ language itself: you can use @samp{&(&@var{ref})}
5456 (or, if you prefer, simply @samp{&&@var{ref}}) to examine the address
5457 where a C++ reference variable (declared with @samp{&@var{ref}}) is
5458 stored.
5459 @end ifclear
5460
5461 @item -
5462 Negative. Defined on integral and floating-point types. Same
5463 precedence as @code{++}.
5464
5465 @item !
5466 Logical negation. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
5467 @code{++}.
5468
5469 @item ~
5470 Bitwise complement operator. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
5471 @code{++}.
5472
5473
5474 @item .@r{, }->
5475 Structure member, and pointer-to-structure member. For convenience,
5476 @value{GDBN} regards the two as equivalent, choosing whether to dereference a
5477 pointer based on the stored type information.
5478 Defined on @code{struct} and @code{union} data.
5479
5480 @item []
5481 Array indexing. @code{@var{a}[@var{i}]} is defined as
5482 @code{*(@var{a}+@var{i})}. Same precedence as @code{->}.
5483
5484 @item ()
5485 Function parameter list. Same precedence as @code{->}.
5486
5487 @ifclear CONLY
5488 @item ::
5489 C++ scope resolution operator. Defined on
5490 @code{struct}, @code{union}, and @code{class} types.
5491 @end ifclear
5492
5493 @item ::
5494 Doubled colons
5495 @ifclear CONLY
5496 also
5497 @end ifclear
5498 represent the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@pxref{Expressions,
5499 ,Expressions}).
5500 @ifclear CONLY
5501 Same precedence as @code{::}, above.
5502 @end ifclear
5503 @end table
5504
5505 @ifclear CONLY
5506 @cindex C and C++ constants
5507 @node C Constants
5508 @subsubsection C and C++ constants
5509
5510 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C and C++ in the
5511 following ways:
5512 @end ifclear
5513 @ifset CONLY
5514 @cindex C constants
5515 @node C Constants
5516 @section C constants
5517
5518 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C in the
5519 following ways:
5520 @end ifset
5521
5522 @itemize @bullet
5523 @item
5524 Integer constants are a sequence of digits. Octal constants are
5525 specified by a leading @samp{0} (ie. zero), and hexadecimal constants by
5526 a leading @samp{0x} or @samp{0X}. Constants may also end with a letter
5527 @samp{l}, specifying that the constant should be treated as a
5528 @code{long} value.
5529
5530 @item
5531 Floating point constants are a sequence of digits, followed by a decimal
5532 point, followed by a sequence of digits, and optionally followed by an
5533 exponent. An exponent is of the form:
5534 @samp{@w{e@r{[[}+@r{]|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}}, where @var{nnn} is another
5535 sequence of digits. The @samp{+} is optional for positive exponents.
5536
5537 @item
5538 Enumerated constants consist of enumerated identifiers, or their
5539 integral equivalents.
5540
5541 @item
5542 Character constants are a single character surrounded by single quotes
5543 (@code{'}), or a number---the ordinal value of the corresponding character
5544 (usually its @sc{ASCII} value). Within quotes, the single character may
5545 be represented by a letter or by @dfn{escape sequences}, which are of
5546 the form @samp{\@var{nnn}}, where @var{nnn} is the octal representation
5547 of the character's ordinal value; or of the form @samp{\@var{x}}, where
5548 @samp{@var{x}} is a predefined special character---for example,
5549 @samp{\n} for newline.
5550
5551 @item
5552 String constants are a sequence of character constants surrounded
5553 by double quotes (@code{"}).
5554
5555 @item
5556 Pointer constants are an integral value. You can also write pointers
5557 to constants using the C operator @samp{&}.
5558
5559 @item
5560 Array constants are comma-separated lists surrounded by braces @samp{@{}
5561 and @samp{@}}; for example, @samp{@{1,2,3@}} is a three-element array of
5562 integers, @samp{@{@{1,2@}, @{3,4@}, @{5,6@}@}} is a three-by-two array,
5563 and @samp{@{&"hi", &"there", &"fred"@}} is a three-element array of pointers.
5564 @end itemize
5565
5566 @ifclear CONLY
5567 @node Cplus expressions
5568 @subsubsection C++ expressions
5569
5570 @cindex expressions in C++
5571 @value{GDBN} expression handling has a number of extensions to
5572 interpret a significant subset of C++ expressions.
5573
5574 @cindex C++ support, not in @sc{coff}
5575 @cindex @sc{coff} versus C++
5576 @cindex C++ and object formats
5577 @cindex object formats and C++
5578 @cindex a.out and C++
5579 @cindex @sc{ecoff} and C++
5580 @cindex @sc{xcoff} and C++
5581 @cindex @sc{elf}/stabs and C++
5582 @cindex @sc{elf}/@sc{dwarf} and C++
5583 @quotation
5584 @emph{Warning:} Most of these extensions depend on the use of additional
5585 debugging information in the symbol table, and thus require a rich,
5586 extendable object code format. In particular, if your system uses
5587 a.out, MIPS @sc{ecoff}, RS/6000 @sc{xcoff}, or Sun @sc{elf} with stabs
5588 extensions to the symbol table, these facilities are all available.
5589 Where the object code format is standard @sc{coff}, on the other hand,
5590 most of the C++ support in @value{GDBN} will @emph{not} work, nor can it.
5591 For the standard SVr4 debugging format, @sc{dwarf} in @sc{elf}, the
5592 standard is still evolving, so the C++ support in @value{GDBN} is still
5593 fragile; when this debugging format stabilizes, however, C++ support
5594 will also be available on systems that use it.
5595 @end quotation
5596
5597 @enumerate
5598
5599 @cindex member functions
5600 @item
5601 Member function calls are allowed; you can use expressions like
5602
5603 @example
5604 count = aml->GetOriginal(x, y)
5605 @end example
5606
5607 @kindex this
5608 @cindex namespace in C++
5609 @item
5610 While a member function is active (in the selected stack frame), your
5611 expressions have the same namespace available as the member function;
5612 that is, @value{GDBN} allows implicit references to the class instance
5613 pointer @code{this} following the same rules as C++.
5614
5615 @cindex call overloaded functions
5616 @cindex type conversions in C++
5617 @item
5618 You can call overloaded functions; @value{GDBN} will resolve the function
5619 call to the right definition, with one restriction---you must use
5620 arguments of the type required by the function that you want to call.
5621 @value{GDBN} will not perform conversions requiring constructors or
5622 user-defined type operators.
5623
5624 @cindex reference declarations
5625 @item
5626 @value{GDBN} understands variables declared as C++ references; you can use them in
5627 expressions just as you do in C++ source---they are automatically
5628 dereferenced.
5629
5630 In the parameter list shown when @value{GDBN} displays a frame, the values of
5631 reference variables are not displayed (unlike other variables); this
5632 avoids clutter, since references are often used for large structures.
5633 The @emph{address} of a reference variable is always shown, unless
5634 you have specified @samp{set print address off}.
5635
5636 @item
5637 @value{GDBN} supports the C++ name resolution operator @code{::}---your
5638 expressions can use it just as expressions in your program do. Since
5639 one scope may be defined in another, you can use @code{::} repeatedly if
5640 necessary, for example in an expression like
5641 @samp{@var{scope1}::@var{scope2}::@var{name}}. @value{GDBN} also allows
5642 resolving name scope by reference to source files, in both C and C++
5643 debugging (@pxref{Variables, ,Program variables}).
5644 @end enumerate
5645
5646 @node C Defaults
5647 @subsubsection C and C++ defaults
5648 @cindex C and C++ defaults
5649
5650 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set type and range checking automatically, they
5651 both default to @code{off} whenever the working language changes to
5652 C or C++. This happens regardless of whether you, or @value{GDBN},
5653 selected the working language.
5654
5655 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, it sets the
5656 working language to C or C++ on entering code compiled from a source file
5657 whose name ends with @file{.c}, @file{.C}, or @file{.cc}.
5658 @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language}, for
5659 further details.
5660
5661 @ifset MOD2
5662 @c Type checking is (a) primarily motivated by Modula-2, and (b)
5663 @c unimplemented. If (b) changes, it might make sense to let this node
5664 @c appear even if Mod-2 does not, but meanwhile ignore it. pesch 16jul93.
5665 @node C Checks
5666 @subsubsection C and C++ type and range checks
5667 @cindex C and C++ checks
5668
5669 By default, when @value{GDBN} parses C or C++ expressions, type checking
5670 is not used. However, if you turn type checking on, @value{GDBN} will
5671 consider two variables type equivalent if:
5672
5673 @itemize @bullet
5674 @item
5675 The two variables are structured and have the same structure, union, or
5676 enumerated tag.
5677
5678 @item
5679 Two two variables have the same type name, or types that have been
5680 declared equivalent through @code{typedef}.
5681
5682 @ignore
5683 @c leaving this out because neither J Gilmore nor R Pesch understand it.
5684 @c FIXME--beers?
5685 @item
5686 The two @code{struct}, @code{union}, or @code{enum} variables are
5687 declared in the same declaration. (Note: this may not be true for all C
5688 compilers.)
5689 @end ignore
5690 @end itemize
5691
5692 Range checking, if turned on, is done on mathematical operations. Array
5693 indices are not checked, since they are often used to index a pointer
5694 that is not itself an array.
5695 @end ifset
5696 @end ifclear
5697
5698 @ifclear CONLY
5699 @node Debugging C
5700 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} and C
5701 @end ifclear
5702 @ifset CONLY
5703 @node Debugging C
5704 @section @value{GDBN} and C
5705 @end ifset
5706
5707 The @code{set print union} and @code{show print union} commands apply to
5708 the @code{union} type. When set to @samp{on}, any @code{union} that is
5709 inside a @code{struct}
5710 @ifclear CONLY
5711 or @code{class}
5712 @end ifclear
5713 will also be printed.
5714 Otherwise, it will appear as @samp{@{...@}}.
5715
5716 The @code{@@} operator aids in the debugging of dynamic arrays, formed
5717 with pointers and a memory allocation function. @xref{Expressions,
5718 ,Expressions}.
5719
5720 @ifclear CONLY
5721 @node Debugging C plus plus
5722 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} features for C++
5723
5724 @cindex commands for C++
5725 Some @value{GDBN} commands are particularly useful with C++, and some are
5726 designed specifically for use with C++. Here is a summary:
5727
5728 @table @code
5729 @cindex break in overloaded functions
5730 @item @r{breakpoint menus}
5731 When you want a breakpoint in a function whose name is overloaded,
5732 @value{GDBN} breakpoint menus help you specify which function definition
5733 you want. @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}.
5734
5735 @cindex overloading in C++
5736 @item rbreak @var{regex}
5737 Setting breakpoints using regular expressions is helpful for setting
5738 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
5739 classes.
5740 @xref{Set Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}.
5741
5742 @cindex C++ exception handling
5743 @item catch @var{exceptions}
5744 @itemx info catch
5745 Debug C++ exception handling using these commands. @xref{Exception
5746 Handling, ,Breakpoints and exceptions}.
5747
5748 @cindex inheritance
5749 @item ptype @var{typename}
5750 Print inheritance relationships as well as other information for type
5751 @var{typename}.
5752 @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
5753
5754 @cindex C++ symbol display
5755 @item set print demangle
5756 @itemx show print demangle
5757 @itemx set print asm-demangle
5758 @itemx show print asm-demangle
5759 Control whether C++ symbols display in their source form, both when
5760 displaying code as C++ source and when displaying disassemblies.
5761 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5762
5763 @item set print object
5764 @itemx show print object
5765 Choose whether to print derived (actual) or declared types of objects.
5766 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5767
5768 @item set print vtbl
5769 @itemx show print vtbl
5770 Control the format for printing virtual function tables.
5771 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
5772
5773 @item @r{Overloaded symbol names}
5774 You can specify a particular definition of an overloaded symbol, using
5775 the same notation that is used to declare such symbols in C++: type
5776 @code{@var{symbol}(@var{types})} rather than just @var{symbol}. You can
5777 also use the @value{GDBN} command-line word completion facilities to list the
5778 available choices, or to finish the type list for you.
5779 @xref{Completion,, Command completion}, for details on how to do this.
5780 @end table
5781 @ifclear MOD2
5782 @c cancels "raisesections" under same conditions near bgn of chapter
5783 @lowersections
5784 @end ifclear
5785
5786 @ifset MOD2
5787 @node Modula-2
5788 @subsection Modula-2
5789 @cindex Modula-2
5790
5791 The extensions made to @value{GDBN} to support Modula-2 only support
5792 output from the GNU Modula-2 compiler (which is currently being
5793 developed). Other Modula-2 compilers are not currently supported, and
5794 attempting to debug executables produced by them will most likely
5795 result in an error as @value{GDBN} reads in the executable's symbol
5796 table.
5797
5798 @cindex expressions in Modula-2
5799 @menu
5800 * M2 Operators:: Built-in operators
5801 * Built-In Func/Proc:: Built-in functions and procedures
5802 * M2 Constants:: Modula-2 constants
5803 * M2 Defaults:: Default settings for Modula-2
5804 * Deviations:: Deviations from standard Modula-2
5805 * M2 Checks:: Modula-2 type and range checks
5806 * M2 Scope:: The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
5807 * GDB/M2:: @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
5808 @end menu
5809
5810 @node M2 Operators
5811 @subsubsection Operators
5812 @cindex Modula-2 operators
5813
5814 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
5815 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
5816 often defined on groups of types. For the purposes of Modula-2, the
5817 following definitions hold:
5818
5819 @itemize @bullet
5820
5821 @item
5822 @emph{Integral types} consist of @code{INTEGER}, @code{CARDINAL}, and
5823 their subranges.
5824
5825 @item
5826 @emph{Character types} consist of @code{CHAR} and its subranges.
5827
5828 @item
5829 @emph{Floating-point types} consist of @code{REAL}.
5830
5831 @item
5832 @emph{Pointer types} consist of anything declared as @code{POINTER TO
5833 @var{type}}.
5834
5835 @item
5836 @emph{Scalar types} consist of all of the above.
5837
5838 @item
5839 @emph{Set types} consist of @code{SET} and @code{BITSET} types.
5840
5841 @item
5842 @emph{Boolean types} consist of @code{BOOLEAN}.
5843 @end itemize
5844
5845 @noindent
5846 The following operators are supported, and appear in order of
5847 increasing precedence:
5848
5849 @table @code
5850 @item ,
5851 Function argument or array index separator.
5852
5853 @item :=
5854 Assignment. The value of @var{var} @code{:=} @var{value} is
5855 @var{value}.
5856
5857 @item <@r{, }>
5858 Less than, greater than on integral, floating-point, or enumerated
5859 types.
5860
5861 @item <=@r{, }>=
5862 Less than, greater than, less than or equal to, greater than or equal to
5863 on integral, floating-point and enumerated types, or set inclusion on
5864 set types. Same precedence as @code{<}.
5865
5866 @item =@r{, }<>@r{, }#
5867 Equality and two ways of expressing inequality, valid on scalar types.
5868 Same precedence as @code{<}. In @value{GDBN} scripts, only @code{<>} is
5869 available for inequality, since @code{#} conflicts with the script
5870 comment character.
5871
5872 @item IN
5873 Set membership. Defined on set types and the types of their members.
5874 Same precedence as @code{<}.
5875
5876 @item OR
5877 Boolean disjunction. Defined on boolean types.
5878
5879 @item AND@r{, }&
5880 Boolean conjuction. Defined on boolean types.
5881
5882 @item @@
5883 The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
5884
5885 @item +@r{, }-
5886 Addition and subtraction on integral and floating-point types, or union
5887 and difference on set types.
5888
5889 @item *
5890 Multiplication on integral and floating-point types, or set intersection
5891 on set types.
5892
5893 @item /
5894 Division on floating-point types, or symmetric set difference on set
5895 types. Same precedence as @code{*}.
5896
5897 @item DIV@r{, }MOD
5898 Integer division and remainder. Defined on integral types. Same
5899 precedence as @code{*}.
5900
5901 @item -
5902 Negative. Defined on @code{INTEGER} and @code{REAL} data.
5903
5904 @item ^
5905 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types.
5906
5907 @item NOT
5908 Boolean negation. Defined on boolean types. Same precedence as
5909 @code{^}.
5910
5911 @item .
5912 @code{RECORD} field selector. Defined on @code{RECORD} data. Same
5913 precedence as @code{^}.
5914
5915 @item []
5916 Array indexing. Defined on @code{ARRAY} data. Same precedence as @code{^}.
5917
5918 @item ()
5919 Procedure argument list. Defined on @code{PROCEDURE} objects. Same precedence
5920 as @code{^}.
5921
5922 @item ::@r{, }.
5923 @value{GDBN} and Modula-2 scope operators.
5924 @end table
5925
5926 @quotation
5927 @emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so @value{GDBN}
5928 will treat the use of the operator @code{IN}, or the use of operators
5929 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{=}, , @code{<>}, @code{#},
5930 @code{<=}, and @code{>=} on sets as an error.
5931 @end quotation
5932
5933 @cindex Modula-2 built-ins
5934 @node Built-In Func/Proc
5935 @subsubsection Built-in functions and procedures
5936
5937 Modula-2 also makes available several built-in procedures and functions.
5938 In describing these, the following metavariables are used:
5939
5940 @table @var
5941
5942 @item a
5943 represents an @code{ARRAY} variable.
5944
5945 @item c
5946 represents a @code{CHAR} constant or variable.
5947
5948 @item i
5949 represents a variable or constant of integral type.
5950
5951 @item m
5952 represents an identifier that belongs to a set. Generally used in the
5953 same function with the metavariable @var{s}. The type of @var{s} should
5954 be @code{SET OF @var{mtype}} (where @var{mtype} is the type of @var{m}).
5955
5956 @item n
5957 represents a variable or constant of integral or floating-point type.
5958
5959 @item r
5960 represents a variable or constant of floating-point type.
5961
5962 @item t
5963 represents a type.
5964
5965 @item v
5966 represents a variable.
5967
5968 @item x
5969 represents a variable or constant of one of many types. See the
5970 explanation of the function for details.
5971 @end table
5972
5973 All Modula-2 built-in procedures also return a result, described below.
5974
5975 @table @code
5976 @item ABS(@var{n})
5977 Returns the absolute value of @var{n}.
5978
5979 @item CAP(@var{c})
5980 If @var{c} is a lower case letter, it returns its upper case
5981 equivalent, otherwise it returns its argument
5982
5983 @item CHR(@var{i})
5984 Returns the character whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
5985
5986 @item DEC(@var{v})
5987 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
5988
5989 @item DEC(@var{v},@var{i})
5990 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
5991 new value.
5992
5993 @item EXCL(@var{m},@var{s})
5994 Removes the element @var{m} from the set @var{s}. Returns the new
5995 set.
5996
5997 @item FLOAT(@var{i})
5998 Returns the floating point equivalent of the integer @var{i}.
5999
6000 @item HIGH(@var{a})
6001 Returns the index of the last member of @var{a}.
6002
6003 @item INC(@var{v})
6004 Increments the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
6005
6006 @item INC(@var{v},@var{i})
6007 Increments the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
6008 new value.
6009
6010 @item INCL(@var{m},@var{s})
6011 Adds the element @var{m} to the set @var{s} if it is not already
6012 there. Returns the new set.
6013
6014 @item MAX(@var{t})
6015 Returns the maximum value of the type @var{t}.
6016
6017 @item MIN(@var{t})
6018 Returns the minimum value of the type @var{t}.
6019
6020 @item ODD(@var{i})
6021 Returns boolean TRUE if @var{i} is an odd number.
6022
6023 @item ORD(@var{x})
6024 Returns the ordinal value of its argument. For example, the ordinal
6025 value of a character is its ASCII value (on machines supporting the
6026 ASCII character set). @var{x} must be of an ordered type, which include
6027 integral, character and enumerated types.
6028
6029 @item SIZE(@var{x})
6030 Returns the size of its argument. @var{x} can be a variable or a type.
6031
6032 @item TRUNC(@var{r})
6033 Returns the integral part of @var{r}.
6034
6035 @item VAL(@var{t},@var{i})
6036 Returns the member of the type @var{t} whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
6037 @end table
6038
6039 @quotation
6040 @emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so
6041 @value{GDBN} will treat the use of procedures @code{INCL} and @code{EXCL} as
6042 an error.
6043 @end quotation
6044
6045 @cindex Modula-2 constants
6046 @node M2 Constants
6047 @subsubsection Constants
6048
6049 @value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of Modula-2 in the following
6050 ways:
6051
6052 @itemize @bullet
6053
6054 @item
6055 Integer constants are simply a sequence of digits. When used in an
6056 expression, a constant is interpreted to be type-compatible with the
6057 rest of the expression. Hexadecimal integers are specified by a
6058 trailing @samp{H}, and octal integers by a trailing @samp{B}.
6059
6060 @item
6061 Floating point constants appear as a sequence of digits, followed by a
6062 decimal point and another sequence of digits. An optional exponent can
6063 then be specified, in the form @samp{E@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}, where
6064 @samp{@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}} is the desired exponent. All of the
6065 digits of the floating point constant must be valid decimal (base 10)
6066 digits.
6067
6068 @item
6069 Character constants consist of a single character enclosed by a pair of
6070 like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}). They may
6071 also be expressed by their ordinal value (their ASCII value, usually)
6072 followed by a @samp{C}.
6073
6074 @item
6075 String constants consist of a sequence of characters enclosed by a
6076 pair of like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}).
6077 Escape sequences in the style of C are also allowed. @xref{C
6078 Constants, ,C and C++ constants}, for a brief explanation of escape
6079 sequences.
6080
6081 @item
6082 Enumerated constants consist of an enumerated identifier.
6083
6084 @item
6085 Boolean constants consist of the identifiers @code{TRUE} and
6086 @code{FALSE}.
6087
6088 @item
6089 Pointer constants consist of integral values only.
6090
6091 @item
6092 Set constants are not yet supported.
6093 @end itemize
6094
6095 @node M2 Defaults
6096 @subsubsection Modula-2 defaults
6097 @cindex Modula-2 defaults
6098
6099 If type and range checking are set automatically by @value{GDBN}, they
6100 both default to @code{on} whenever the working language changes to
6101 Modula-2. This happens regardless of whether you, or @value{GDBN},
6102 selected the working language.
6103
6104 If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, then entering
6105 code compiled from a file whose name ends with @file{.mod} will set the
6106 working language to Modula-2. @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} set
6107 the language automatically}, for further details.
6108
6109 @node Deviations
6110 @subsubsection Deviations from standard Modula-2
6111 @cindex Modula-2, deviations from
6112
6113 A few changes have been made to make Modula-2 programs easier to debug.
6114 This is done primarily via loosening its type strictness:
6115
6116 @itemize @bullet
6117 @item
6118 Unlike in standard Modula-2, pointer constants can be formed by
6119 integers. This allows you to modify pointer variables during
6120 debugging. (In standard Modula-2, the actual address contained in a
6121 pointer variable is hidden from you; it can only be modified
6122 through direct assignment to another pointer variable or expression that
6123 returned a pointer.)
6124
6125 @item
6126 C escape sequences can be used in strings and characters to represent
6127 non-printable characters. @value{GDBN} will print out strings with these
6128 escape sequences embedded. Single non-printable characters are
6129 printed using the @samp{CHR(@var{nnn})} format.
6130
6131 @item
6132 The assignment operator (@code{:=}) returns the value of its right-hand
6133 argument.
6134
6135 @item
6136 All built-in procedures both modify @emph{and} return their argument.
6137 @end itemize
6138
6139 @node M2 Checks
6140 @subsubsection Modula-2 type and range checks
6141 @cindex Modula-2 checks
6142
6143 @quotation
6144 @emph{Warning:} in this release, @value{GDBN} does not yet perform type or
6145 range checking.
6146 @end quotation
6147 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range checks added
6148
6149 @value{GDBN} considers two Modula-2 variables type equivalent if:
6150
6151 @itemize @bullet
6152 @item
6153 They are of types that have been declared equivalent via a @code{TYPE
6154 @var{t1} = @var{t2}} statement
6155
6156 @item
6157 They have been declared on the same line. (Note: This is true of the
6158 GNU Modula-2 compiler, but it may not be true of other compilers.)
6159 @end itemize
6160
6161 As long as type checking is enabled, any attempt to combine variables
6162 whose types are not equivalent is an error.
6163
6164 Range checking is done on all mathematical operations, assignment, array
6165 index bounds, and all built-in functions and procedures.
6166
6167 @node M2 Scope
6168 @subsubsection The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
6169 @cindex scope
6170 @kindex .
6171 @cindex colon, doubled as scope operator
6172 @ifinfo
6173 @kindex colon-colon
6174 @c Info cannot handle :: but TeX can.
6175 @end ifinfo
6176 @iftex
6177 @kindex ::
6178 @end iftex
6179
6180 There are a few subtle differences between the Modula-2 scope operator
6181 (@code{.}) and the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@code{::}). The two have
6182 similar syntax:
6183
6184 @example
6185
6186 @var{module} . @var{id}
6187 @var{scope} :: @var{id}
6188 @end example
6189
6190 @noindent
6191 where @var{scope} is the name of a module or a procedure,
6192 @var{module} the name of a module, and @var{id} is any declared
6193 identifier within your program, except another module.
6194
6195 Using the @code{::} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the scope
6196 specified by @var{scope} for the identifier @var{id}. If it is not
6197 found in the specified scope, then @value{GDBN} will search all scopes
6198 enclosing the one specified by @var{scope}.
6199
6200 Using the @code{.} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the current scope for
6201 the identifier specified by @var{id} that was imported from the
6202 definition module specified by @var{module}. With this operator, it is
6203 an error if the identifier @var{id} was not imported from definition
6204 module @var{module}, or if @var{id} is not an identifier in
6205 @var{module}.
6206
6207 @node GDB/M2
6208 @subsubsection @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
6209
6210 Some @value{GDBN} commands have little use when debugging Modula-2 programs.
6211 Five subcommands of @code{set print} and @code{show print} apply
6212 specifically to C and C++: @samp{vtbl}, @samp{demangle},
6213 @samp{asm-demangle}, @samp{object}, and @samp{union}. The first four
6214 apply to C++, and the last to the C @code{union} type, which has no direct
6215 analogue in Modula-2.
6216
6217 The @code{@@} operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}), while available
6218 while using any language, is not useful with Modula-2. Its
6219 intent is to aid the debugging of @dfn{dynamic arrays}, which cannot be
6220 created in Modula-2 as they can in C or C++. However, because an
6221 address can be specified by an integral constant, the construct
6222 @samp{@{@var{type}@}@var{adrexp}} is still useful. (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions})
6223
6224 @cindex @code{#} in Modula-2
6225 In @value{GDBN} scripts, the Modula-2 inequality operator @code{#} is
6226 interpreted as the beginning of a comment. Use @code{<>} instead.
6227
6228 @end ifset
6229 @end ifclear
6230
6231 @node Symbols
6232 @chapter Examining the Symbol Table
6233
6234 The commands described in this section allow you to inquire about the
6235 symbols (names of variables, functions and types) defined in your
6236 program. This information is inherent in the text of your program and
6237 does not change as your program executes. @value{GDBN} finds it in your
6238 program's symbol table, in the file indicated when you started @value{GDBN}
6239 (@pxref{File Options, ,Choosing files}), or by one of the
6240 file-management commands (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
6241
6242 @c FIXME! This might be intentionally specific to C and C++; if so, move
6243 @c to someplace in C section of lang chapter.
6244 @cindex symbol names
6245 @cindex names of symbols
6246 @cindex quoting names
6247 Occasionally, you may need to refer to symbols that contain unusual
6248 characters, which @value{GDBN} ordinarily treats as word delimiters. The
6249 most frequent case is in referring to static variables in other
6250 source files (@pxref{Variables,,Program variables}). File names
6251 are recorded in object files as debugging symbols, but @value{GDBN} would
6252 ordinarily parse a typical file name, like @file{foo.c}, as the three words
6253 @samp{foo} @samp{.} @samp{c}. To allow @value{GDBN} to recognize
6254 @samp{foo.c} as a single symbol, enclose it in single quotes; for example,
6255
6256 @example
6257 p 'foo.c'::x
6258 @end example
6259
6260 @noindent
6261 looks up the value of @code{x} in the scope of the file @file{foo.c}.
6262
6263 @table @code
6264 @item info address @var{symbol}
6265 @kindex info address
6266 Describe where the data for @var{symbol} is stored. For a register
6267 variable, this says which register it is kept in. For a non-register
6268 local variable, this prints the stack-frame offset at which the variable
6269 is always stored.
6270
6271 Note the contrast with @samp{print &@var{symbol}}, which does not work
6272 at all for a register variable, and for a stack local variable prints
6273 the exact address of the current instantiation of the variable.
6274
6275 @item whatis @var{exp}
6276 @kindex whatis
6277 Print the data type of expression @var{exp}. @var{exp} is not
6278 actually evaluated, and any side-effecting operations (such as
6279 assignments or function calls) inside it do not take place.
6280 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
6281
6282 @item whatis
6283 Print the data type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
6284
6285 @item ptype @var{typename}
6286 @kindex ptype
6287 Print a description of data type @var{typename}. @var{typename} may be
6288 the name of a type, or for C code it may have the form
6289 @ifclear CONLY
6290 @samp{class @var{class-name}},
6291 @end ifclear
6292 @samp{struct @var{struct-tag}}, @samp{union @var{union-tag}} or
6293 @samp{enum @var{enum-tag}}.
6294
6295 @item ptype @var{exp}
6296 @itemx ptype
6297 Print a description of the type of expression @var{exp}. @code{ptype}
6298 differs from @code{whatis} by printing a detailed description, instead
6299 of just the name of the type.
6300
6301 For example, for this variable declaration:
6302
6303 @example
6304 struct complex @{double real; double imag;@} v;
6305 @end example
6306
6307 @noindent
6308 the two commands give this output:
6309
6310 @example
6311 @group
6312 (@value{GDBP}) whatis v
6313 type = struct complex
6314 (@value{GDBP}) ptype v
6315 type = struct complex @{
6316 double real;
6317 double imag;
6318 @}
6319 @end group
6320 @end example
6321
6322 @noindent
6323 As with @code{whatis}, using @code{ptype} without an argument refers to
6324 the type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
6325
6326 @item info types @var{regexp}
6327 @itemx info types
6328 @kindex info types
6329 Print a brief description of all types whose name matches @var{regexp}
6330 (or all types in your program, if you supply no argument). Each
6331 complete typename is matched as though it were a complete line; thus,
6332 @samp{i type value} gives information on all types in your program whose
6333 name includes the string @code{value}, but @samp{i type ^value$} gives
6334 information only on types whose complete name is @code{value}.
6335
6336 This command differs from @code{ptype} in two ways: first, like
6337 @code{whatis}, it does not print a detailed description; second, it
6338 lists all source files where a type is defined.
6339
6340 @item info source
6341 @kindex info source
6342 Show the name of the current source file---that is, the source file for
6343 the function containing the current point of execution---and the language
6344 it was written in.
6345
6346 @item info sources
6347 @kindex info sources
6348 Print the names of all source files in your program for which there is
6349 debugging information, organized into two lists: files whose symbols
6350 have already been read, and files whose symbols will be read when needed.
6351
6352 @item info functions
6353 @kindex info functions
6354 Print the names and data types of all defined functions.
6355
6356 @item info functions @var{regexp}
6357 Print the names and data types of all defined functions
6358 whose names contain a match for regular expression @var{regexp}.
6359 Thus, @samp{info fun step} finds all functions whose names
6360 include @code{step}; @samp{info fun ^step} finds those whose names
6361 start with @code{step}.
6362
6363 @item info variables
6364 @kindex info variables
6365 Print the names and data types of all variables that are declared
6366 outside of functions (i.e., excluding local variables).
6367
6368 @item info variables @var{regexp}
6369 Print the names and data types of all variables (except for local
6370 variables) whose names contain a match for regular expression
6371 @var{regexp}.
6372
6373 @ignore
6374 This was never implemented.
6375 @item info methods
6376 @itemx info methods @var{regexp}
6377 @kindex info methods
6378 The @code{info methods} command permits the user to examine all defined
6379 methods within C++ program, or (with the @var{regexp} argument) a
6380 specific set of methods found in the various C++ classes. Many
6381 C++ classes provide a large number of methods. Thus, the output
6382 from the @code{ptype} command can be overwhelming and hard to use. The
6383 @code{info-methods} command filters the methods, printing only those
6384 which match the regular-expression @var{regexp}.
6385 @end ignore
6386
6387 @item maint print symbols @var{filename}
6388 @itemx maint print psymbols @var{filename}
6389 @itemx maint print msymbols @var{filename}
6390 @kindex maint print symbols
6391 @cindex symbol dump
6392 @kindex maint print psymbols
6393 @cindex partial symbol dump
6394 Write a dump of debugging symbol data into the file @var{filename}.
6395 These commands are used to debug the @value{GDBN} symbol-reading code. Only
6396 symbols with debugging data are included. If you use @samp{maint print
6397 symbols}, @value{GDBN} includes all the symbols for which it has already
6398 collected full details: that is, @var{filename} reflects symbols for
6399 only those files whose symbols @value{GDBN} has read. You can use the
6400 command @code{info sources} to find out which files these are. If you
6401 use @samp{maint print psymbols} instead, the dump shows information about
6402 symbols that @value{GDBN} only knows partially---that is, symbols defined in
6403 files that @value{GDBN} has skimmed, but not yet read completely. Finally,
6404 @samp{maint print msymbols} dumps just the minimal symbol information
6405 required for each object file from which @value{GDBN} has read some symbols.
6406 @xref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}, for a discussion of how
6407 @value{GDBN} reads symbols (in the description of @code{symbol-file}).
6408 @end table
6409
6410 @node Altering
6411 @chapter Altering Execution
6412
6413 Once you think you have found an error in your program, you might want to
6414 find out for certain whether correcting the apparent error would lead to
6415 correct results in the rest of the run. You can find the answer by
6416 experiment, using the @value{GDBN} features for altering execution of the
6417 program.
6418
6419 For example, you can store new values into variables or memory
6420 locations,
6421 @ifclear BARETARGET
6422 give your program a signal, restart it
6423 @end ifclear
6424 @ifset BARETARGET
6425 restart your program
6426 @end ifset
6427 at a different address, or even return prematurely from a function to
6428 its caller.
6429
6430 @menu
6431 * Assignment:: Assignment to variables
6432 * Jumping:: Continuing at a different address
6433 @ifclear BARETARGET
6434 * Signaling:: Giving your program a signal
6435 @end ifclear
6436
6437 * Returning:: Returning from a function
6438 * Calling:: Calling your program's functions
6439 * Patching:: Patching your program
6440 @end menu
6441
6442 @node Assignment
6443 @section Assignment to variables
6444
6445 @cindex assignment
6446 @cindex setting variables
6447 To alter the value of a variable, evaluate an assignment expression.
6448 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}. For example,
6449
6450 @example
6451 print x=4
6452 @end example
6453
6454 @noindent
6455 stores the value 4 into the variable @code{x}, and then prints the
6456 value of the assignment expression (which is 4).
6457 @ifclear CONLY
6458 @xref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages}, for more
6459 information on operators in supported languages.
6460 @end ifclear
6461
6462 @kindex set variable
6463 @cindex variables, setting
6464 If you are not interested in seeing the value of the assignment, use the
6465 @code{set} command instead of the @code{print} command. @code{set} is
6466 really the same as @code{print} except that the expression's value is
6467 not printed and is not put in the value history (@pxref{Value History,
6468 ,Value history}). The expression is evaluated only for its effects.
6469
6470 If the beginning of the argument string of the @code{set} command
6471 appears identical to a @code{set} subcommand, use the @code{set
6472 variable} command instead of just @code{set}. This command is identical
6473 to @code{set} except for its lack of subcommands. For example, if
6474 your program has a variable @code{width}, you get
6475 an error if you try to set a new value with just @samp{set width=13},
6476 because @value{GDBN} has the command @code{set width}:
6477
6478 @example
6479 (@value{GDBP}) whatis width
6480 type = double
6481 (@value{GDBP}) p width
6482 $4 = 13
6483 (@value{GDBP}) set width=47
6484 Invalid syntax in expression.
6485 @end example
6486
6487 @noindent
6488 The invalid expression, of course, is @samp{=47}. In
6489 order to actually set the program's variable @code{width}, use
6490
6491 @example
6492 (@value{GDBP}) set var width=47
6493 @end example
6494
6495 @value{GDBN} allows more implicit conversions in assignments than C; you can
6496 freely store an integer value into a pointer variable or vice versa,
6497 and you can convert any structure to any other structure that is the
6498 same length or shorter.
6499 @comment FIXME: how do structs align/pad in these conversions?
6500 @comment /pesch@cygnus.com 18dec1990
6501
6502 To store values into arbitrary places in memory, use the @samp{@{@dots{}@}}
6503 construct to generate a value of specified type at a specified address
6504 (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). For example, @code{@{int@}0x83040} refers
6505 to memory location @code{0x83040} as an integer (which implies a certain size
6506 and representation in memory), and
6507
6508 @example
6509 set @{int@}0x83040 = 4
6510 @end example
6511
6512 @noindent
6513 stores the value 4 into that memory location.
6514
6515 @node Jumping
6516 @section Continuing at a different address
6517
6518 Ordinarily, when you continue your program, you do so at the place where
6519 it stopped, with the @code{continue} command. You can instead continue at
6520 an address of your own choosing, with the following commands:
6521
6522 @table @code
6523 @item jump @var{linespec}
6524 @kindex jump
6525 Resume execution at line @var{linespec}. Execution will stop
6526 immediately if there is a breakpoint there. @xref{List, ,Printing
6527 source lines}, for a description of the different forms of
6528 @var{linespec}.
6529
6530 The @code{jump} command does not change the current stack frame, or
6531 the stack pointer, or the contents of any memory location or any
6532 register other than the program counter. If line @var{linespec} is in
6533 a different function from the one currently executing, the results may
6534 be bizarre if the two functions expect different patterns of arguments or
6535 of local variables. For this reason, the @code{jump} command requests
6536 confirmation if the specified line is not in the function currently
6537 executing. However, even bizarre results are predictable if you are
6538 well acquainted with the machine-language code of your program.
6539
6540 @item jump *@var{address}
6541 Resume execution at the instruction at address @var{address}.
6542 @end table
6543
6544 You can get much the same effect as the @code{jump} command by storing a
6545 new value into the register @code{$pc}. The difference is that this
6546 does not start your program running; it only changes the address where it
6547 @emph{will} run when it is continued. For example,
6548
6549 @example
6550 set $pc = 0x485
6551 @end example
6552
6553 @noindent
6554 causes the next @code{continue} command or stepping command to execute at
6555 address @code{0x485}, rather than at the address where your program stopped.
6556 @xref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and stepping}.
6557
6558 The most common occasion to use the @code{jump} command is to back up,
6559 perhaps with more breakpoints set, over a portion of a program that has
6560 already executed, in order to examine its execution in more detail.
6561
6562 @ifclear BARETARGET
6563 @c @group
6564 @node Signaling
6565 @section Giving your program a signal
6566
6567 @table @code
6568 @item signal @var{signal}
6569 @kindex signal
6570 Resume execution where your program stopped, but immediately give it the
6571 signal @var{signal}. @var{signal} can be the name or the number of a
6572 signal. For example, on many systems @code{signal 2} and @code{signal
6573 SIGINT} are both ways of sending an interrupt signal.
6574
6575 Alternatively, if @var{signal} is zero, continue execution without
6576 giving a signal. This is useful when your program stopped on account of
6577 a signal and would ordinary see the signal when resumed with the
6578 @code{continue} command; @samp{signal 0} causes it to resume without a
6579 signal.
6580
6581 @code{signal} does not repeat when you press @key{RET} a second time
6582 after executing the command.
6583 @end table
6584 @c @end group
6585
6586 Invoking the @code{signal} command is not the same as invoking the
6587 @code{kill} utility from the shell. Sending a signal with @code{kill}
6588 causes @value{GDBN} to decide what to do with the signal depending on
6589 the signal handling tables (@pxref{Signals}). The @code{signal} command
6590 passes the signal directly to your program.
6591
6592 @end ifclear
6593
6594 @node Returning
6595 @section Returning from a function
6596
6597 @table @code
6598 @item return
6599 @itemx return @var{expression}
6600 @cindex returning from a function
6601 @kindex return
6602 You can cancel execution of a function call with the @code{return}
6603 command. If you give an
6604 @var{expression} argument, its value is used as the function's return
6605 value.
6606 @end table
6607
6608 When you use @code{return}, @value{GDBN} discards the selected stack frame
6609 (and all frames within it). You can think of this as making the
6610 discarded frame return prematurely. If you wish to specify a value to
6611 be returned, give that value as the argument to @code{return}.
6612
6613 This pops the selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a
6614 frame}), and any other frames inside of it, leaving its caller as the
6615 innermost remaining frame. That frame becomes selected. The
6616 specified value is stored in the registers used for returning values
6617 of functions.
6618
6619 The @code{return} command does not resume execution; it leaves the
6620 program stopped in the state that would exist if the function had just
6621 returned. In contrast, the @code{finish} command (@pxref{Continuing
6622 and Stepping, ,Continuing and stepping}) resumes execution until the
6623 selected stack frame returns naturally.
6624
6625 @node Calling
6626 @section Calling program functions
6627
6628 @cindex calling functions
6629 @kindex call
6630 @table @code
6631 @item call @var{expr}
6632 Evaluate the expression @var{expr} without displaying @code{void}
6633 returned values.
6634 @end table
6635
6636 You can use this variant of the @code{print} command if you want to
6637 execute a function from your program, but without cluttering the output
6638 with @code{void} returned values. The result is printed and saved in
6639 the value history, if it is not void.
6640
6641 @node Patching
6642 @section Patching programs
6643 @cindex patching binaries
6644 @cindex writing into executables
6645 @ifclear BARETARGET
6646 @cindex writing into corefiles
6647 @end ifclear
6648
6649 By default, @value{GDBN} opens the file containing your program's executable
6650 code
6651 @ifclear BARETARGET
6652 (or the corefile)
6653 @end ifclear
6654 read-only. This prevents accidental alterations
6655 to machine code; but it also prevents you from intentionally patching
6656 your program's binary.
6657
6658 If you'd like to be able to patch the binary, you can specify that
6659 explicitly with the @code{set write} command. For example, you might
6660 want to turn on internal debugging flags, or even to make emergency
6661 repairs.
6662
6663 @table @code
6664 @item set write on
6665 @itemx set write off
6666 @kindex set write
6667 If you specify @samp{set write on}, @value{GDBN} will open executable
6668 @ifclear BARETARGET
6669 and core
6670 @end ifclear
6671 files for both reading and writing; if you specify @samp{set write
6672 off} (the default), @value{GDBN} will open them read-only.
6673
6674 If you have already loaded a file, you must load it again (using the
6675 @code{exec-file}
6676 @ifclear BARETARGET
6677 or @code{core-file}
6678 @end ifclear
6679 command) after changing @code{set write}, for your new setting to take
6680 effect.
6681
6682 @item show write
6683 @kindex show write
6684 Display whether executable files
6685 @ifclear BARETARGET
6686 and core files
6687 @end ifclear
6688 will be opened for writing as well as reading.
6689 @end table
6690
6691 @node GDB Files
6692 @chapter @value{GDBN} Files
6693
6694 @value{GDBN} needs to know the file name of the program to be debugged, both in
6695 order to read its symbol table and in order to start your program.
6696 @ifclear BARETARGET
6697 To debug a core dump of a previous run, you must also tell @value{GDBN}
6698 the name of the core dump file.
6699 @end ifclear
6700
6701 @menu
6702 * Files:: Commands to specify files
6703 * Symbol Errors:: Errors reading symbol files
6704 @end menu
6705
6706 @node Files
6707 @section Commands to specify files
6708 @cindex symbol table
6709
6710 @ifclear BARETARGET
6711 @cindex core dump file
6712 The usual way to specify executable and core dump file names is with
6713 the command arguments given when you start @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Invocation,
6714 ,Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}}.
6715 @end ifclear
6716 @ifset BARETARGET
6717 The usual way to specify an executable file name is with
6718 the command argument given when you start @value{GDBN}, (@pxref{Invocation,
6719 ,Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}}.
6720 @end ifset
6721
6722 Occasionally it is necessary to change to a different file during a
6723 @value{GDBN} session. Or you may run @value{GDBN} and forget to specify
6724 a file you want to use. In these situations the @value{GDBN} commands
6725 to specify new files are useful.
6726
6727 @table @code
6728 @item file @var{filename}
6729 @cindex executable file
6730 @kindex file
6731 Use @var{filename} as the program to be debugged. It is read for its
6732 symbols and for the contents of pure memory. It is also the program
6733 executed when you use the @code{run} command. If you do not specify a
6734 directory and the file is not found in the @value{GDBN} working directory, @value{GDBN}
6735 uses the environment variable @code{PATH} as a list of directories to
6736 search, just as the shell does when looking for a program to run. You
6737 can change the value of this variable, for both @value{GDBN} and your program,
6738 using the @code{path} command.
6739
6740 On systems with memory-mapped files, an auxiliary symbol table file
6741 @file{@var{filename}.syms} may be available for @var{filename}. If it
6742 is, @value{GDBN} will map in the symbol table from
6743 @file{@var{filename}.syms}, starting up more quickly. See the
6744 descriptions of the options @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow} (available
6745 on the command line, and with the commands @code{file}, @code{symbol-file},
6746 or @code{add-symbol-file}), for more information.
6747
6748 @item file
6749 @code{file} with no argument makes @value{GDBN} discard any information it
6750 has on both executable file and the symbol table.
6751
6752 @item exec-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6753 @kindex exec-file
6754 Specify that the program to be run (but not the symbol table) is found
6755 in @var{filename}. @value{GDBN} will search the environment variable @code{PATH}
6756 if necessary to locate your program. Omitting @var{filename} means to
6757 discard information on the executable file.
6758
6759 @item symbol-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6760 @kindex symbol-file
6761 Read symbol table information from file @var{filename}. @code{PATH} is
6762 searched when necessary. Use the @code{file} command to get both symbol
6763 table and program to run from the same file.
6764
6765 @code{symbol-file} with no argument clears out @value{GDBN} information on your
6766 program's symbol table.
6767
6768 The @code{symbol-file} command causes @value{GDBN} to forget the contents of its
6769 convenience variables, the value history, and all breakpoints and
6770 auto-display expressions. This is because they may contain pointers to
6771 the internal data recording symbols and data types, which are part of
6772 the old symbol table data being discarded inside @value{GDBN}.
6773
6774 @code{symbol-file} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
6775 executing it once.
6776
6777 When @value{GDBN} is configured for a particular environment, it will
6778 understand debugging information in whatever format is the standard
6779 generated for that environment; you may use either a GNU compiler, or
6780 other compilers that adhere to the local conventions. Best results are
6781 usually obtained from GNU compilers; for example, using @code{@value{GCC}}
6782 you can generate debugging information for optimized code.
6783
6784 On some kinds of object files, the @code{symbol-file} command does not
6785 normally read the symbol table in full right away. Instead, it scans
6786 the symbol table quickly to find which source files and which symbols
6787 are present. The details are read later, one source file at a time,
6788 as they are needed.
6789
6790 The purpose of this two-stage reading strategy is to make @value{GDBN} start up
6791 faster. For the most part, it is invisible except for occasional
6792 pauses while the symbol table details for a particular source file are
6793 being read. (The @code{set verbose} command can turn these pauses
6794 into messages if desired. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings
6795 and messages}.)
6796
6797 We have not implemented the two-stage strategy for COFF yet. When the
6798 symbol table is stored in COFF format, @code{symbol-file} reads the
6799 symbol table data in full right away.
6800
6801 @item symbol-file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6802 @itemx file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6803 @kindex readnow
6804 @cindex reading symbols immediately
6805 @cindex symbols, reading immediately
6806 @kindex mapped
6807 @cindex memory-mapped symbol file
6808 @cindex saving symbol table
6809 You can override the @value{GDBN} two-stage strategy for reading symbol
6810 tables by using the @samp{-readnow} option with any of the commands that
6811 load symbol table information, if you want to be sure @value{GDBN} has the
6812 entire symbol table available.
6813
6814 @ifclear BARETARGET
6815 If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the
6816 @code{mmap} system call, you can use another option, @samp{-mapped}, to
6817 cause @value{GDBN} to write the symbols for your program into a reusable
6818 file. Future @value{GDBN} debugging sessions will map in symbol information
6819 from this auxiliary symbol file (if the program has not changed), rather
6820 than spending time reading the symbol table from the executable
6821 program. Using the @samp{-mapped} option has the same effect as
6822 starting @value{GDBN} with the @samp{-mapped} command-line option.
6823
6824 You can use both options together, to make sure the auxiliary symbol
6825 file has all the symbol information for your program.
6826
6827 The auxiliary symbol file for a program called @var{myprog} is called
6828 @samp{@var{myprog}.syms}. Once this file exists (so long as it is newer
6829 than the corresponding executable), @value{GDBN} will always attempt to use
6830 it when you debug @var{myprog}; no special options or commands are
6831 needed.
6832
6833 The @file{.syms} file is specific to the host machine where you run
6834 @value{GDBN}. It holds an exact image of the internal @value{GDBN}
6835 symbol table. It cannot be shared across multiple host platforms.
6836
6837 @c FIXME: for now no mention of directories, since this seems to be in
6838 @c flux. 13mar1992 status is that in theory GDB would look either in
6839 @c current dir or in same dir as myprog; but issues like competing
6840 @c GDB's, or clutter in system dirs, mean that in practice right now
6841 @c only current dir is used. FFish says maybe a special GDB hierarchy
6842 @c (eg rooted in val of env var GDBSYMS) could exist for mappable symbol
6843 @c files.
6844
6845 @item core-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6846 @kindex core
6847 @kindex core-file
6848 Specify the whereabouts of a core dump file to be used as the ``contents
6849 of memory''. Traditionally, core files contain only some parts of the
6850 address space of the process that generated them; @value{GDBN} can access the
6851 executable file itself for other parts.
6852
6853 @code{core-file} with no argument specifies that no core file is
6854 to be used.
6855
6856 Note that the core file is ignored when your program is actually running
6857 under @value{GDBN}. So, if you have been running your program and you wish to
6858 debug a core file instead, you must kill the subprocess in which the
6859 program is running. To do this, use the @code{kill} command
6860 (@pxref{Kill Process, ,Killing the child process}).
6861 @end ifclear
6862
6863 @item load @var{filename}
6864 @kindex load
6865 @ifset GENERIC
6866 Depending on what remote debugging facilities are configured into
6867 @value{GDBN}, the @code{load} command may be available. Where it exists, it
6868 is meant to make @var{filename} (an executable) available for debugging
6869 on the remote system---by downloading, or dynamic linking, for example.
6870 @code{load} also records the @var{filename} symbol table in @value{GDBN}, like
6871 the @code{add-symbol-file} command.
6872
6873 If your @value{GDBN} does not have a @code{load} command, attempting to
6874 execute it gets the error message ``@code{You can't do that when your
6875 target is @dots{}}''
6876 @end ifset
6877
6878 The file is loaded at whatever address is specified in the executable.
6879 For some object file formats, you can specify the load address when you
6880 link the program; for other formats, like a.out, the object file format
6881 specifies a fixed address.
6882 @c FIXME! This would be a good place for an xref to the GNU linker doc.
6883
6884 @ifset VXWORKS
6885 On VxWorks, @code{load} will dynamically link @var{filename} on the
6886 current target system as well as adding its symbols in @value{GDBN}.
6887 @end ifset
6888
6889 @ifset I960
6890 @cindex download to Nindy-960
6891 With the Nindy interface to an Intel 960 board, @code{load} will
6892 download @var{filename} to the 960 as well as adding its symbols in
6893 @value{GDBN}.
6894 @end ifset
6895
6896 @ifset H8
6897 @cindex download to H8/300 or H8/500
6898 @cindex H8/300 or H8/500 download
6899 @cindex download to Hitachi SH
6900 @cindex Hitachi SH download
6901 When you select remote debugging to a Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500 board
6902 (@pxref{Hitachi Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}),
6903 the @code{load} command downloads your program to the Hitachi board and also
6904 opens it as the current executable target for @value{GDBN} on your host
6905 (like the @code{file} command).
6906 @end ifset
6907
6908 @code{load} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
6909
6910 @ifclear BARETARGET
6911 @item add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address}
6912 @itemx add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6913 @kindex add-symbol-file
6914 @cindex dynamic linking
6915 The @code{add-symbol-file} command reads additional symbol table information
6916 from the file @var{filename}. You would use this command when @var{filename}
6917 has been dynamically loaded (by some other means) into the program that
6918 is running. @var{address} should be the memory address at which the
6919 file has been loaded; @value{GDBN} cannot figure this out for itself.
6920 You can specify @var{address} as an expression.
6921
6922 The symbol table of the file @var{filename} is added to the symbol table
6923 originally read with the @code{symbol-file} command. You can use the
6924 @code{add-symbol-file} command any number of times; the new symbol data thus
6925 read keeps adding to the old. To discard all old symbol data instead,
6926 use the @code{symbol-file} command.
6927
6928 @code{add-symbol-file} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
6929
6930 You can use the @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow} options just as with
6931 the @code{symbol-file} command, to change how @value{GDBN} manages the symbol
6932 table information for @var{filename}.
6933 @end ifclear
6934
6935 @item info files
6936 @itemx info target
6937 @kindex info files
6938 @kindex info target
6939 @code{info files} and @code{info target} are synonymous; both print
6940 the current target (@pxref{Targets, ,Specifying a Debugging Target}),
6941 including the
6942 @ifclear BARETARGET
6943 names of the executable and core dump files
6944 @end ifclear
6945 @ifset BARETARGET
6946 name of the executable file
6947 @end ifset
6948 currently in use by @value{GDBN}, and the files from which symbols were
6949 loaded. The command @code{help targets} lists all possible targets
6950 rather than current ones.
6951 @end table
6952
6953 All file-specifying commands allow both absolute and relative file names
6954 as arguments. @value{GDBN} always converts the file name to an absolute path
6955 name and remembers it that way.
6956
6957 @ifclear BARETARGET
6958 @cindex shared libraries
6959 @value{GDBN} supports SunOS, SVR4, and IBM RS/6000 shared libraries.
6960 @value{GDBN} automatically loads symbol definitions from shared libraries
6961 when you use the @code{run} command, or when you examine a core file.
6962 (Before you issue the @code{run} command, @value{GDBN} will not understand
6963 references to a function in a shared library, however---unless you are
6964 debugging a core file).
6965 @c FIXME: next @value{GDBN} release should permit some refs to undef
6966 @c FIXME...symbols---eg in a break cmd---assuming they are from a shared lib
6967
6968 @table @code
6969 @item info share
6970 @itemx info sharedlibrary
6971 @kindex info sharedlibrary
6972 @kindex info share
6973 Print the names of the shared libraries which are currently loaded.
6974
6975 @item sharedlibrary @var{regex}
6976 @itemx share @var{regex}
6977 @kindex sharedlibrary
6978 @kindex share
6979 This is an obsolescent command; you can use it to explicitly load shared
6980 object library symbols for files matching a Unix regular expression, but
6981 as with files loaded automatically, it will only load shared libraries
6982 required by your program for a core file or after typing @code{run}. If
6983 @var{regex} is omitted all shared libraries required by your program are
6984 loaded.
6985 @end table
6986 @end ifclear
6987
6988 @node Symbol Errors
6989 @section Errors reading symbol files
6990
6991 While reading a symbol file, @value{GDBN} will occasionally encounter problems,
6992 such as symbol types it does not recognize, or known bugs in compiler
6993 output. By default, @value{GDBN} does not notify you of such problems, since
6994 they are relatively common and primarily of interest to people
6995 debugging compilers. If you are interested in seeing information
6996 about ill-constructed symbol tables, you can either ask @value{GDBN} to print
6997 only one message about each such type of problem, no matter how many
6998 times the problem occurs; or you can ask @value{GDBN} to print more messages,
6999 to see how many times the problems occur, with the @code{set
7000 complaints} command (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
7001 messages}).
7002
7003 The messages currently printed, and their meanings, include:
7004
7005 @table @code
7006 @item inner block not inside outer block in @var{symbol}
7007
7008 The symbol information shows where symbol scopes begin and end
7009 (such as at the start of a function or a block of statements). This
7010 error indicates that an inner scope block is not fully contained
7011 in its outer scope blocks.
7012
7013 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the inner block as if it had
7014 the same scope as the outer block. In the error message, @var{symbol}
7015 may be shown as ``@code{(don't know)}'' if the outer block is not a
7016 function.
7017
7018 @item block at @var{address} out of order
7019
7020 The symbol information for symbol scope blocks should occur in
7021 order of increasing addresses. This error indicates that it does not
7022 do so.
7023
7024 @value{GDBN} does not circumvent this problem, and will have trouble
7025 locating symbols in the source file whose symbols it is reading. (You
7026 can often determine what source file is affected by specifying
7027 @code{set verbose on}. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional warnings and
7028 messages}.)
7029
7030 @item bad block start address patched
7031
7032 The symbol information for a symbol scope block has a start address
7033 smaller than the address of the preceding source line. This is known
7034 to occur in the SunOS 4.1.1 (and earlier) C compiler.
7035
7036 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by treating the symbol scope block as
7037 starting on the previous source line.
7038
7039 @item bad string table offset in symbol @var{n}
7040
7041 @cindex foo
7042 Symbol number @var{n} contains a pointer into the string table which is
7043 larger than the size of the string table.
7044
7045 @value{GDBN} circumvents the problem by considering the symbol to have the
7046 name @code{foo}, which may cause other problems if many symbols end up
7047 with this name.
7048
7049 @item unknown symbol type @code{0x@var{nn}}
7050
7051 The symbol information contains new data types that @value{GDBN} does not yet
7052 know how to read. @code{0x@var{nn}} is the symbol type of the misunderstood
7053 information, in hexadecimal.
7054
7055 @value{GDBN} circumvents the error by ignoring this symbol information. This
7056 will usually allow your program to be debugged, though certain symbols
7057 will not be accessible. If you encounter such a problem and feel like
7058 debugging it, you can debug @code{@value{GDBP}} with itself, breakpoint on
7059 @code{complain}, then go up to the function @code{read_dbx_symtab} and
7060 examine @code{*bufp} to see the symbol.
7061
7062 @item stub type has NULL name
7063 @value{GDBN} could not find the full definition for
7064 @ifclear CONLY
7065 a struct or class.
7066 @end ifclear
7067 @ifset CONLY
7068 a struct.
7069 @end ifset
7070
7071 @ifclear CONLY
7072 @item const/volatile indicator missing (ok if using g++ v1.x), got@dots{}
7073
7074 The symbol information for a C++ member function is missing some
7075 information that recent versions of the compiler should have output
7076 for it.
7077 @end ifclear
7078
7079 @item info mismatch between compiler and debugger
7080
7081 @value{GDBN} could not parse a type specification output by the compiler.
7082 @end table
7083
7084 @node Targets
7085 @chapter Specifying a Debugging Target
7086 @cindex debugging target
7087 @kindex target
7088
7089 A @dfn{target} is the execution environment occupied by your program.
7090 @ifclear BARETARGET
7091 Often, @value{GDBN} runs in the same host environment as your program; in
7092 that case, the debugging target is specified as a side effect when you
7093 use the @code{file} or @code{core} commands. When you need more
7094 flexibility---for example, running @value{GDBN} on a physically separate
7095 host, or controlling a standalone system over a serial port or a
7096 realtime system over a TCP/IP connection---you
7097 @end ifclear
7098 @ifset BARETARGET
7099 You
7100 @end ifset
7101 can use the @code{target} command to specify one of the target types
7102 configured for @value{GDBN} (@pxref{Target Commands, ,Commands for managing
7103 targets}).
7104
7105 @menu
7106 * Active Targets:: Active targets
7107 * Target Commands:: Commands for managing targets
7108 * Remote:: Remote debugging
7109 @end menu
7110
7111 @node Active Targets
7112 @section Active targets
7113 @cindex stacking targets
7114 @cindex active targets
7115 @cindex multiple targets
7116
7117 @ifclear BARETARGET
7118 There are three classes of targets: processes, core files, and
7119 executable files. @value{GDBN} can work concurrently on up to three active
7120 targets, one in each class. This allows you to (for example) start a
7121 process and inspect its activity without abandoning your work on a core
7122 file.
7123
7124 For example, if you execute @samp{gdb a.out}, then the executable file
7125 @code{a.out} is the only active target. If you designate a core file as
7126 well---presumably from a prior run that crashed and coredumped---then
7127 @value{GDBN} has two active targets and will use them in tandem, looking
7128 first in the corefile target, then in the executable file, to satisfy
7129 requests for memory addresses. (Typically, these two classes of target
7130 are complementary, since core files contain only a program's
7131 read-write memory---variables and so on---plus machine status, while
7132 executable files contain only the program text and initialized data.)
7133 @end ifclear
7134
7135 When you type @code{run}, your executable file becomes an active process
7136 target as well. When a process target is active, all @value{GDBN} commands
7137 requesting memory addresses refer to that target; addresses in an
7138 @ifclear BARETARGET
7139 active core file or
7140 @end ifclear
7141 executable file target are obscured while the process
7142 target is active.
7143
7144 @ifset BARETARGET
7145 Use the @code{exec-file} command to select a
7146 new executable target (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify
7147 files}).
7148 @end ifset
7149 @ifclear BARETARGET
7150 Use the @code{core-file} and @code{exec-file} commands to select a
7151 new core file or executable target (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify
7152 files}). To specify as a target a process that is already running, use
7153 the @code{attach} command (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an
7154 already-running process}).
7155 @end ifclear
7156
7157 @node Target Commands
7158 @section Commands for managing targets
7159
7160 @table @code
7161 @item target @var{type} @var{parameters}
7162 Connects the @value{GDBN} host environment to a target
7163 @ifset BARETARGET
7164 machine.
7165 @end ifset
7166 @ifclear BARETARGET
7167 machine or process. A target is typically a protocol for talking to
7168 debugging facilities. You use the argument @var{type} to specify the
7169 type or protocol of the target machine.
7170
7171 Further @var{parameters} are interpreted by the target protocol, but
7172 typically include things like device names or host names to connect
7173 with, process numbers, and baud rates.
7174 @end ifclear
7175
7176 The @code{target} command will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again
7177 after executing the command.
7178
7179 @item help target
7180 @kindex help target
7181 Displays the names of all targets available. To display targets
7182 currently selected, use either @code{info target} or @code{info files}
7183 (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
7184
7185 @item help target @var{name}
7186 Describe a particular target, including any parameters necessary to
7187 select it.
7188 @end table
7189
7190 Here are some common targets (available, or not, depending on the GDB
7191 configuration):
7192
7193 @table @code
7194 @item target exec @var{program}
7195 @kindex target exec
7196 An executable file. @samp{target exec @var{program}} is the same as
7197 @samp{exec-file @var{program}}.
7198
7199 @ifclear BARETARGET
7200 @item target core @var{filename}
7201 @kindex target core
7202 A core dump file. @samp{target core @var{filename}} is the same as
7203 @samp{core-file @var{filename}}.
7204 @end ifclear
7205
7206 @ifset REMOTESTUB
7207 @item target remote @var{dev}
7208 @kindex target remote
7209 Remote serial target in GDB-specific protocol. The argument @var{dev}
7210 specifies what serial device to use for the connection (e.g.
7211 @file{/dev/ttya}). @xref{Remote, ,Remote debugging}.
7212 @end ifset
7213
7214 @ifset SIMS
7215 @item target sim
7216 @kindex target sim
7217 CPU simulator. @xref{Simulator,,Simulated CPU Target}.
7218 @end ifset
7219
7220 @ifset AMD29K
7221 @item target udi @var{keyword}
7222 @kindex target udi
7223 Remote AMD29K target, using the AMD UDI protocol. The @var{keyword}
7224 argument specifies which 29K board or simulator to use. @xref{UDI29K
7225 Remote,,The UDI protocol for AMD29K}.
7226
7227 @item target amd-eb @var{dev} @var{speed} @var{PROG}
7228 @kindex target amd-eb
7229 @cindex AMD EB29K
7230 Remote PC-resident AMD EB29K board, attached over serial lines.
7231 @var{dev} is the serial device, as for @code{target remote};
7232 @var{speed} allows you to specify the linespeed; and @var{PROG} is the
7233 name of the program to be debugged, as it appears to DOS on the PC.
7234 @xref{EB29K Remote, ,The EBMON protocol for AMD29K}.
7235
7236 @end ifset
7237 @ifset H8
7238 @item target hms
7239 @kindex target hms
7240 A Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500 board, attached via serial line to your host.
7241 @ifclear H8EXCLUSIVE
7242 @c Unix only, not currently of interest for H8-only manual
7243 Use special commands @code{device} and @code{speed} to control the serial
7244 line and the communications speed used.
7245 @end ifclear
7246 @xref{Hitachi Remote,,@value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors}.
7247
7248 @end ifset
7249 @ifset I960
7250 @item target nindy @var{devicename}
7251 @kindex target nindy
7252 An Intel 960 board controlled by a Nindy Monitor. @var{devicename} is
7253 the name of the serial device to use for the connection, e.g.
7254 @file{/dev/ttya}. @xref{i960-Nindy Remote, ,@value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)}.
7255
7256 @end ifset
7257 @ifset ST2000
7258 @item target st2000 @var{dev} @var{speed}
7259 @kindex target st2000
7260 A Tandem ST2000 phone switch, running Tandem's STDBUG protocol. @var{dev}
7261 is the name of the device attached to the ST2000 serial line;
7262 @var{speed} is the communication line speed. The arguments are not used
7263 if @value{GDBN} is configured to connect to the ST2000 using TCP or Telnet.
7264 @xref{ST2000 Remote,,@value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000}.
7265
7266 @end ifset
7267 @ifset VXWORKS
7268 @item target vxworks @var{machinename}
7269 @kindex target vxworks
7270 A VxWorks system, attached via TCP/IP. The argument @var{machinename}
7271 is the target system's machine name or IP address.
7272 @xref{VxWorks Remote, ,@value{GDBN} and VxWorks}.
7273 @end ifset
7274 @end table
7275
7276 @ifset GENERIC
7277 Different targets are available on different configurations of @value{GDBN}; your
7278 configuration may have more or fewer targets.
7279 @end ifset
7280
7281 @node Remote
7282 @section Remote debugging
7283 @cindex remote debugging
7284
7285 If you are trying to debug a program running on a machine that cannot run
7286 GDB in the usual way, it is often useful to use remote debugging. For
7287 example, you might use remote debugging on an operating system kernel, or on
7288 a small system which does not have a general purpose operating system
7289 powerful enough to run a full-featured debugger.
7290
7291 Some configurations of GDB have special serial or TCP/IP interfaces
7292 to make this work with particular debugging targets. In addition,
7293 GDB comes with a generic serial protocol (specific to GDB, but
7294 not specific to any particular target system) which you can use if you
7295 write the remote stubs---the code that will run on the remote system to
7296 communicate with GDB.
7297
7298 Other remote targets may be available in your
7299 configuration of GDB; use @code{help targets} to list them.
7300
7301 @ifset GENERIC
7302 @c Text on starting up GDB in various specific cases; it goes up front
7303 @c in manuals configured for any of those particular situations, here
7304 @c otherwise.
7305 @menu
7306 @ifset REMOTESTUB
7307 * Remote Serial:: @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol
7308 @end ifset
7309 @ifset I960
7310 * i960-Nindy Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a remote i960 (Nindy)
7311 @end ifset
7312 @ifset AMD29K
7313 * UDI29K Remote:: The UDI protocol for AMD29K
7314 * EB29K Remote:: The EBMON protocol for AMD29K
7315 @end ifset
7316 @ifset VXWORKS
7317 * VxWorks Remote:: @value{GDBN} and VxWorks
7318 @end ifset
7319 @ifset ST2000
7320 * ST2000 Remote:: @value{GDBN} with a Tandem ST2000
7321 @end ifset
7322 @ifset H8
7323 * Hitachi Remote:: @value{GDBN} and Hitachi Microprocessors
7324 @end ifset
7325 @ifset MIPS
7326 * MIPS Remote:: @value{GDBN} and MIPS boards
7327 @end ifset
7328 @ifset SIMS
7329 * Simulator:: Simulated CPU target
7330 @end ifset
7331 @end menu
7332
7333 @include remote.texi
7334 @end ifset
7335
7336 @node Controlling GDB
7337 @chapter Controlling @value{GDBN}
7338
7339 You can alter the way @value{GDBN} interacts with you by using
7340 the @code{set} command. For commands controlling how @value{GDBN} displays
7341 data, @pxref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}; other settings are described here.
7342
7343 @menu
7344 * Prompt:: Prompt
7345 * Editing:: Command editing
7346 * History:: Command history
7347 * Screen Size:: Screen size
7348 * Numbers:: Numbers
7349 * Messages/Warnings:: Optional warnings and messages
7350 @end menu
7351
7352 @node Prompt
7353 @section Prompt
7354 @cindex prompt
7355
7356 @value{GDBN} indicates its readiness to read a command by printing a string
7357 called the @dfn{prompt}. This string is normally @samp{(@value{GDBP})}. You
7358 can change the prompt string with the @code{set prompt} command. For
7359 instance, when debugging @value{GDBN} with @value{GDBN}, it is useful to change
7360 the prompt in one of the @value{GDBN} sessions so that you can always tell which
7361 one you are talking to.
7362
7363 @table @code
7364 @item set prompt @var{newprompt}
7365 @kindex set prompt
7366 Directs @value{GDBN} to use @var{newprompt} as its prompt string henceforth.
7367 @kindex show prompt
7368 @item show prompt
7369 Prints a line of the form: @samp{Gdb's prompt is: @var{your-prompt}}
7370 @end table
7371
7372 @node Editing
7373 @section Command editing
7374 @cindex readline
7375 @cindex command line editing
7376
7377 @value{GDBN} reads its input commands via the @dfn{readline} interface. This
7378 GNU library provides consistent behavior for programs which provide a
7379 command line interface to the user. Advantages are @code{emacs}-style
7380 or @code{vi}-style inline editing of commands, @code{csh}-like history
7381 substitution, and a storage and recall of command history across
7382 debugging sessions.
7383
7384 You may control the behavior of command line editing in @value{GDBN} with the
7385 command @code{set}.
7386
7387 @table @code
7388 @kindex set editing
7389 @cindex editing
7390 @item set editing
7391 @itemx set editing on
7392 Enable command line editing (enabled by default).
7393
7394 @item set editing off
7395 Disable command line editing.
7396
7397 @kindex show editing
7398 @item show editing
7399 Show whether command line editing is enabled.
7400 @end table
7401
7402 @node History
7403 @section Command history
7404
7405 @value{GDBN} can keep track of the commands you type during your
7406 debugging sessions, so that you can be certain of precisely what
7407 happened. Use these commands to manage the @value{GDBN} command
7408 history facility.
7409
7410 @table @code
7411 @cindex history substitution
7412 @cindex history file
7413 @kindex set history filename
7414 @item set history filename @var{fname}
7415 Set the name of the @value{GDBN} command history file to @var{fname}. This is
7416 the file from which @value{GDBN} will read an initial command history
7417 list or to which it will write this list when it exits. This list is
7418 accessed through history expansion or through the history
7419 command editing characters listed below. This file defaults to the
7420 value of the environment variable @code{GDBHISTFILE}, or to
7421 @file{./.gdb_history} if this variable is not set.
7422
7423 @cindex history save
7424 @kindex set history save
7425 @item set history save
7426 @itemx set history save on
7427 Record command history in a file, whose name may be specified with the
7428 @code{set history filename} command. By default, this option is disabled.
7429
7430 @item set history save off
7431 Stop recording command history in a file.
7432
7433 @cindex history size
7434 @kindex set history size
7435 @item set history size @var{size}
7436 Set the number of commands which @value{GDBN} will keep in its history list.
7437 This defaults to the value of the environment variable
7438 @code{HISTSIZE}, or to 256 if this variable is not set.
7439 @end table
7440
7441 @cindex history expansion
7442 History expansion assigns special meaning to the character @kbd{!}.
7443 @ifset have-readline-appendices
7444 @xref{Event Designators}.
7445 @end ifset
7446
7447 Since @kbd{!} is also the logical not operator in C, history expansion
7448 is off by default. If you decide to enable history expansion with the
7449 @code{set history expansion on} command, you may sometimes need to
7450 follow @kbd{!} (when it is used as logical not, in an expression) with
7451 a space or a tab to prevent it from being expanded. The readline
7452 history facilities will not attempt substitution on the strings
7453 @kbd{!=} and @kbd{!(}, even when history expansion is enabled.
7454
7455 The commands to control history expansion are:
7456
7457 @table @code
7458
7459 @kindex set history expansion
7460 @item set history expansion on
7461 @itemx set history expansion
7462 Enable history expansion. History expansion is off by default.
7463
7464 @item set history expansion off
7465 Disable history expansion.
7466
7467 The readline code comes with more complete documentation of
7468 editing and history expansion features. Users unfamiliar with @code{emacs}
7469 or @code{vi} may wish to read it.
7470 @ifset have-readline-appendices
7471 @xref{Command Line Editing}.
7472 @end ifset
7473
7474 @c @group
7475 @kindex show history
7476 @item show history
7477 @itemx show history filename
7478 @itemx show history save
7479 @itemx show history size
7480 @itemx show history expansion
7481 These commands display the state of the @value{GDBN} history parameters.
7482 @code{show history} by itself displays all four states.
7483 @c @end group
7484 @end table
7485
7486 @table @code
7487 @kindex show commands
7488 @item show commands
7489 Display the last ten commands in the command history.
7490
7491 @item show commands @var{n}
7492 Print ten commands centered on command number @var{n}.
7493
7494 @item show commands +
7495 Print ten commands just after the commands last printed.
7496 @end table
7497
7498 @node Screen Size
7499 @section Screen size
7500 @cindex size of screen
7501 @cindex pauses in output
7502
7503 Certain commands to @value{GDBN} may produce large amounts of
7504 information output to the screen. To help you read all of it,
7505 @value{GDBN} pauses and asks you for input at the end of each page of
7506 output. Type @key{RET} when you want to continue the output, or @kbd{q}
7507 to discard the remaining output. Also, the screen width setting
7508 determines when to wrap lines of output. Depending on what is being
7509 printed, @value{GDBN} tries to break the line at a readable place,
7510 rather than simply letting it overflow onto the following line.
7511
7512 Normally @value{GDBN} knows the size of the screen from the termcap data base
7513 together with the value of the @code{TERM} environment variable and the
7514 @code{stty rows} and @code{stty cols} settings. If this is not correct,
7515 you can override it with the @code{set height} and @code{set
7516 width} commands:
7517
7518 @table @code
7519 @item set height @var{lpp}
7520 @itemx show height
7521 @itemx set width @var{cpl}
7522 @itemx show width
7523 @kindex set height
7524 @kindex set width
7525 @kindex show width
7526 @kindex show height
7527 These @code{set} commands specify a screen height of @var{lpp} lines and
7528 a screen width of @var{cpl} characters. The associated @code{show}
7529 commands display the current settings.
7530
7531 If you specify a height of zero lines, @value{GDBN} will not pause during output
7532 no matter how long the output is. This is useful if output is to a file
7533 or to an editor buffer.
7534
7535 Likewise, you can specify @samp{set width 0} to prevent @value{GDBN}
7536 from wrapping its output.
7537 @end table
7538
7539 @node Numbers
7540 @section Numbers
7541 @cindex number representation
7542 @cindex entering numbers
7543
7544 You can always enter numbers in octal, decimal, or hexadecimal in @value{GDBN} by
7545 the usual conventions: octal numbers begin with @samp{0}, decimal
7546 numbers end with @samp{.}, and hexadecimal numbers begin with @samp{0x}.
7547 Numbers that begin with none of these are, by default, entered in base
7548 10; likewise, the default display for numbers---when no particular
7549 format is specified---is base 10. You can change the default base for
7550 both input and output with the @code{set radix} command.
7551
7552 @table @code
7553 @kindex set radix
7554 @item set radix @var{base}
7555 Set the default base for numeric input and display. Supported choices
7556 for @var{base} are decimal 8, 10, or 16. @var{base} must itself be
7557 specified either unambiguously or using the current default radix; for
7558 example, any of
7559
7560 @example
7561 set radix 012
7562 set radix 10.
7563 set radix 0xa
7564 @end example
7565
7566 @noindent
7567 will set the base to decimal. On the other hand, @samp{set radix 10}
7568 will leave the radix unchanged no matter what it was.
7569
7570 @kindex show radix
7571 @item show radix
7572 Display the current default base for numeric input and display.
7573 @end table
7574
7575 @node Messages/Warnings
7576 @section Optional warnings and messages
7577
7578 By default, @value{GDBN} is silent about its inner workings. If you are running
7579 on a slow machine, you may want to use the @code{set verbose} command.
7580 It will make @value{GDBN} tell you when it does a lengthy internal operation, so
7581 you will not think it has crashed.
7582
7583 Currently, the messages controlled by @code{set verbose} are those
7584 which announce that the symbol table for a source file is being read;
7585 see @code{symbol-file} in @ref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}.
7586
7587 @table @code
7588 @kindex set verbose
7589 @item set verbose on
7590 Enables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
7591
7592 @item set verbose off
7593 Disables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
7594
7595 @kindex show verbose
7596 @item show verbose
7597 Displays whether @code{set verbose} is on or off.
7598 @end table
7599
7600 By default, if @value{GDBN} encounters bugs in the symbol table of an object
7601 file, it is silent; but if you are debugging a compiler, you may find
7602 this information useful (@pxref{Symbol Errors, ,Errors reading symbol files}).
7603
7604 @table @code
7605 @kindex set complaints
7606 @item set complaints @var{limit}
7607 Permits @value{GDBN} to output @var{limit} complaints about each type of unusual
7608 symbols before becoming silent about the problem. Set @var{limit} to
7609 zero to suppress all complaints; set it to a large number to prevent
7610 complaints from being suppressed.
7611
7612 @kindex show complaints
7613 @item show complaints
7614 Displays how many symbol complaints @value{GDBN} is permitted to produce.
7615 @end table
7616
7617 By default, @value{GDBN} is cautious, and asks what sometimes seems to be a
7618 lot of stupid questions to confirm certain commands. For example, if
7619 you try to run a program which is already running:
7620
7621 @example
7622 (@value{GDBP}) run
7623 The program being debugged has been started already.
7624 Start it from the beginning? (y or n)
7625 @end example
7626
7627 If you are willing to unflinchingly face the consequences of your own
7628 commands, you can disable this ``feature'':
7629
7630 @table @code
7631 @kindex set confirm
7632 @cindex flinching
7633 @cindex confirmation
7634 @cindex stupid questions
7635 @item set confirm off
7636 Disables confirmation requests.
7637
7638 @item set confirm on
7639 Enables confirmation requests (the default).
7640
7641 @item show confirm
7642 @kindex show confirm
7643 Displays state of confirmation requests.
7644 @end table
7645
7646 @c FIXME this does not really belong here. But where *does* it belong?
7647 @cindex reloading symbols
7648 Some systems allow individual object files that make up your program to
7649 be replaced without stopping and restarting your program.
7650 @ifset VXWORKS
7651 For example, in VxWorks you can simply recompile a defective object file
7652 and keep on running.
7653 @end ifset
7654 If you are running on one of these systems, you can allow @value{GDBN} to
7655 reload the symbols for automatically relinked modules:
7656
7657 @table @code
7658 @kindex set symbol-reloading
7659 @item set symbol-reloading on
7660 Replace symbol definitions for the corresponding source file when an
7661 object file with a particular name is seen again.
7662
7663 @item set symbol-reloading off
7664 Do not replace symbol definitions when re-encountering object files of
7665 the same name. This is the default state; if you are not running on a
7666 system that permits automatically relinking modules, you should leave
7667 @code{symbol-reloading} off, since otherwise @value{GDBN} may discard symbols
7668 when linking large programs, that may contain several modules (from
7669 different directories or libraries) with the same name.
7670
7671 @item show symbol-reloading
7672 Show the current @code{on} or @code{off} setting.
7673 @end table
7674
7675 @node Sequences
7676 @chapter Canned Sequences of Commands
7677
7678 Aside from breakpoint commands (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint
7679 command lists}), @value{GDBN} provides two ways to store sequences of commands
7680 for execution as a unit: user-defined commands and command files.
7681
7682 @menu
7683 * Define:: User-defined commands
7684 * Hooks:: User-defined command hooks
7685 * Command Files:: Command files
7686 * Output:: Commands for controlled output
7687 @end menu
7688
7689 @node Define
7690 @section User-defined commands
7691
7692 @cindex user-defined command
7693 A @dfn{user-defined command} is a sequence of @value{GDBN} commands to which you
7694 assign a new name as a command. This is done with the @code{define}
7695 command.
7696
7697 @table @code
7698 @item define @var{commandname}
7699 @kindex define
7700 Define a command named @var{commandname}. If there is already a command
7701 by that name, you are asked to confirm that you want to redefine it.
7702
7703 The definition of the command is made up of other @value{GDBN} command lines,
7704 which are given following the @code{define} command. The end of these
7705 commands is marked by a line containing @code{end}.
7706
7707 @item document @var{commandname}
7708 @kindex document
7709 Give documentation to the user-defined command @var{commandname}. The
7710 command @var{commandname} must already be defined. This command reads
7711 lines of documentation just as @code{define} reads the lines of the
7712 command definition, ending with @code{end}. After the @code{document}
7713 command is finished, @code{help} on command @var{commandname} will print
7714 the documentation you have specified.
7715
7716 You may use the @code{document} command again to change the
7717 documentation of a command. Redefining the command with @code{define}
7718 does not change the documentation.
7719
7720 @item help user-defined
7721 @kindex help user-defined
7722 List all user-defined commands, with the first line of the documentation
7723 (if any) for each.
7724
7725 @item show user
7726 @itemx show user @var{commandname}
7727 @kindex show user
7728 Display the @value{GDBN} commands used to define @var{commandname} (but not its
7729 documentation). If no @var{commandname} is given, display the
7730 definitions for all user-defined commands.
7731 @end table
7732
7733 User-defined commands do not take arguments. When they are executed, the
7734 commands of the definition are not printed. An error in any command
7735 stops execution of the user-defined command.
7736
7737 Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
7738 without asking when used inside a user-defined command. Many @value{GDBN} commands
7739 that normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
7740 when used in a user-defined command.
7741
7742 @node Hooks
7743 @section User-defined command hooks
7744 @cindex command files
7745
7746 You may define @emph{hooks}, which are a special kind of user-defined
7747 command. Whenever you run the command @samp{foo}, if the user-defined
7748 command @samp{hook-foo} exists, it is executed (with no arguments)
7749 before that command.
7750
7751 In addition, a pseudo-command, @samp{stop} exists. Defining
7752 (@samp{hook-stop}) makes the associated commands execute every time
7753 execution stops in your program: before breakpoint commands are run,
7754 displays are printed, or the stack frame is printed.
7755
7756 @ifclear BARETARGET
7757 For example, to ignore @code{SIGALRM} signals while
7758 single-stepping, but treat them normally during normal execution,
7759 you could define:
7760
7761 @example
7762 define hook-stop
7763 handle SIGALRM nopass
7764 end
7765
7766 define hook-run
7767 handle SIGALRM pass
7768 end
7769
7770 define hook-continue
7771 handle SIGLARM pass
7772 end
7773 @end example
7774 @end ifclear
7775
7776 You can define a hook for any single-word command in @value{GDBN}, but
7777 not for command aliases; you should define a hook for the basic command
7778 name, e.g. @code{backtrace} rather than @code{bt}.
7779 @c FIXME! So how does Joe User discover whether a command is an alias
7780 @c or not?
7781 If an error occurs during the execution of your hook, execution of
7782 @value{GDBN} commands stops and @value{GDBN} issues a prompt
7783 (before the command that you actually typed had a chance to run).
7784
7785 If you try to define a hook which does not match any known command, you
7786 will get a warning from the @code{define} command.
7787
7788 @node Command Files
7789 @section Command files
7790
7791 @cindex command files
7792 A command file for @value{GDBN} is a file of lines that are @value{GDBN} commands. Comments
7793 (lines starting with @kbd{#}) may also be included. An empty line in a
7794 command file does nothing; it does not mean to repeat the last command, as
7795 it would from the terminal.
7796
7797 @cindex init file
7798 @cindex @file{@value{GDBINIT}}
7799 When you start @value{GDBN}, it automatically executes commands from its
7800 @dfn{init files}. These are files named @file{@value{GDBINIT}}.
7801 @value{GDBN} reads the init file (if any) in your home directory, then
7802 processes command line options and operands, and then reads the init
7803 file (if any) in the current working directory. This is so the init
7804 file in your home directory can set options (such as @code{set
7805 complaints}) which affect the processing of the command line options and
7806 operands. The init files are not executed if you use the @samp{-nx}
7807 option; @pxref{Mode Options, ,Choosing modes}.
7808
7809 @ifset GENERIC
7810 @cindex init file name
7811 On some configurations of @value{GDBN}, the init file is known by a
7812 different name (these are typically environments where a specialized
7813 form of GDB may need to coexist with other forms, hence a different name
7814 for the specialized version's init file). These are the environments
7815 with special init file names:
7816
7817 @itemize @bullet
7818 @kindex .vxgdbinit
7819 @item
7820 VxWorks (Wind River Systems real-time OS): @samp{.vxgdbinit}
7821
7822 @kindex .os68gdbinit
7823 @item
7824 OS68K (Enea Data Systems real-time OS): @samp{.os68gdbinit}
7825
7826 @kindex .esgdbinit
7827 @item
7828 ES-1800 (Ericsson Telecom AB M68000 emulator): @samp{.esgdbinit}
7829 @end itemize
7830 @end ifset
7831
7832 You can also request the execution of a command file with the
7833 @code{source} command:
7834
7835 @table @code
7836 @item source @var{filename}
7837 @kindex source
7838 Execute the command file @var{filename}.
7839 @end table
7840
7841 The lines in a command file are executed sequentially. They are not
7842 printed as they are executed. An error in any command terminates execution
7843 of the command file.
7844
7845 Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
7846 without asking when used in a command file. Many @value{GDBN} commands that
7847 normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
7848 when called from command files.
7849
7850 @node Output
7851 @section Commands for controlled output
7852
7853 During the execution of a command file or a user-defined command, normal
7854 @value{GDBN} output is suppressed; the only output that appears is what is
7855 explicitly printed by the commands in the definition. This section
7856 describes three commands useful for generating exactly the output you
7857 want.
7858
7859 @table @code
7860 @item echo @var{text}
7861 @kindex echo
7862 @c I do not consider backslash-space a standard C escape sequence
7863 @c because it is not in ANSI.
7864 Print @var{text}. Nonprinting characters can be included in
7865 @var{text} using C escape sequences, such as @samp{\n} to print a
7866 newline. @strong{No newline will be printed unless you specify one.}
7867 In addition to the standard C escape sequences, a backslash followed
7868 by a space stands for a space. This is useful for displaying a
7869 string with spaces at the beginning or the end, since leading and
7870 trailing spaces are otherwise trimmed from all arguments.
7871 To print @samp{@w{ }and foo =@w{ }}, use the command
7872 @samp{echo \@w{ }and foo = \@w{ }}.
7873
7874 A backslash at the end of @var{text} can be used, as in C, to continue
7875 the command onto subsequent lines. For example,
7876
7877 @example
7878 echo This is some text\n\
7879 which is continued\n\
7880 onto several lines.\n
7881 @end example
7882
7883 produces the same output as
7884
7885 @example
7886 echo This is some text\n
7887 echo which is continued\n
7888 echo onto several lines.\n
7889 @end example
7890
7891 @item output @var{expression}
7892 @kindex output
7893 Print the value of @var{expression} and nothing but that value: no
7894 newlines, no @samp{$@var{nn} = }. The value is not entered in the
7895 value history either. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on
7896 expressions.
7897
7898 @item output/@var{fmt} @var{expression}
7899 Print the value of @var{expression} in format @var{fmt}. You can use
7900 the same formats as for @code{print}. @xref{Output Formats,,Output
7901 formats}, for more information.
7902
7903 @item printf @var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{}
7904 @kindex printf
7905 Print the values of the @var{expressions} under the control of
7906 @var{string}. The @var{expressions} are separated by commas and may be
7907 either numbers or pointers. Their values are printed as specified by
7908 @var{string}, exactly as if your program were to execute the C
7909 subroutine
7910
7911 @example
7912 printf (@var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{});
7913 @end example
7914
7915 For example, you can print two values in hex like this:
7916
7917 @smallexample
7918 printf "foo, bar-foo = 0x%x, 0x%x\n", foo, bar-foo
7919 @end smallexample
7920
7921 The only backslash-escape sequences that you can use in the format
7922 string are the simple ones that consist of backslash followed by a
7923 letter.
7924 @end table
7925
7926 @ifclear DOSHOST
7927 @node Emacs
7928 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} under GNU Emacs
7929
7930 @cindex emacs
7931 A special interface allows you to use GNU Emacs to view (and
7932 edit) the source files for the program you are debugging with
7933 @value{GDBN}.
7934
7935 To use this interface, use the command @kbd{M-x gdb} in Emacs. Give the
7936 executable file you want to debug as an argument. This command starts
7937 @value{GDBN} as a subprocess of Emacs, with input and output through a newly
7938 created Emacs buffer.
7939
7940 Using @value{GDBN} under Emacs is just like using @value{GDBN} normally except for two
7941 things:
7942
7943 @itemize @bullet
7944 @item
7945 All ``terminal'' input and output goes through the Emacs buffer.
7946 @end itemize
7947
7948 This applies both to @value{GDBN} commands and their output, and to the input
7949 and output done by the program you are debugging.
7950
7951 This is useful because it means that you can copy the text of previous
7952 commands and input them again; you can even use parts of the output
7953 in this way.
7954
7955 All the facilities of Emacs' Shell mode are available for interacting
7956 with your program. In particular, you can send signals the usual
7957 way---for example, @kbd{C-c C-c} for an interrupt, @kbd{C-c C-z} for a
7958 stop.
7959
7960 @itemize @bullet
7961 @item
7962 @value{GDBN} displays source code through Emacs.
7963 @end itemize
7964
7965 Each time @value{GDBN} displays a stack frame, Emacs automatically finds the
7966 source file for that frame and puts an arrow (@samp{=>}) at the
7967 left margin of the current line. Emacs uses a separate buffer for
7968 source display, and splits the screen to show both your @value{GDBN} session
7969 and the source.
7970
7971 Explicit @value{GDBN} @code{list} or search commands still produce output as
7972 usual, but you probably will have no reason to use them.
7973
7974 @quotation
7975 @emph{Warning:} If the directory where your program resides is not your
7976 current directory, it can be easy to confuse Emacs about the location of
7977 the source files, in which case the auxiliary display buffer will not
7978 appear to show your source. @value{GDBN} can find programs by searching your
7979 environment's @code{PATH} variable, so the @value{GDBN} input and output
7980 session will proceed normally; but Emacs does not get enough information
7981 back from @value{GDBN} to locate the source files in this situation. To
7982 avoid this problem, either start @value{GDBN} mode from the directory where
7983 your program resides, or specify a full path name when prompted for the
7984 @kbd{M-x gdb} argument.
7985
7986 A similar confusion can result if you use the @value{GDBN} @code{file} command to
7987 switch to debugging a program in some other location, from an existing
7988 @value{GDBN} buffer in Emacs.
7989 @end quotation
7990
7991 By default, @kbd{M-x gdb} calls the program called @file{gdb}. If
7992 you need to call @value{GDBN} by a different name (for example, if you keep
7993 several configurations around, with different names) you can set the
7994 Emacs variable @code{gdb-command-name}; for example,
7995
7996 @example
7997 (setq gdb-command-name "mygdb")
7998 @end example
7999
8000 @noindent
8001 (preceded by @kbd{ESC ESC}, or typed in the @code{*scratch*} buffer, or
8002 in your @file{.emacs} file) will make Emacs call the program named
8003 ``@code{mygdb}'' instead.
8004
8005 In the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer, you can use these special Emacs commands in
8006 addition to the standard Shell mode commands:
8007
8008 @table @kbd
8009 @item C-h m
8010 Describe the features of Emacs' @value{GDBN} Mode.
8011
8012 @item M-s
8013 Execute to another source line, like the @value{GDBN} @code{step} command; also
8014 update the display window to show the current file and location.
8015
8016 @item M-n
8017 Execute to next source line in this function, skipping all function
8018 calls, like the @value{GDBN} @code{next} command. Then update the display window
8019 to show the current file and location.
8020
8021 @item M-i
8022 Execute one instruction, like the @value{GDBN} @code{stepi} command; update
8023 display window accordingly.
8024
8025 @item M-x gdb-nexti
8026 Execute to next instruction, using the @value{GDBN} @code{nexti} command; update
8027 display window accordingly.
8028
8029 @item C-c C-f
8030 Execute until exit from the selected stack frame, like the @value{GDBN}
8031 @code{finish} command.
8032
8033 @item M-c
8034 Continue execution of your program, like the @value{GDBN} @code{continue}
8035 command.
8036
8037 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-p}.
8038
8039 @item M-u
8040 Go up the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument
8041 (@pxref{Arguments, , Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}),
8042 like the @value{GDBN} @code{up} command.
8043
8044 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-u}.
8045
8046 @item M-d
8047 Go down the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument, like the
8048 @value{GDBN} @code{down} command.
8049
8050 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-d}.
8051
8052 @item C-x &
8053 Read the number where the cursor is positioned, and insert it at the end
8054 of the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer. For example, if you wish to disassemble code
8055 around an address that was displayed earlier, type @kbd{disassemble};
8056 then move the cursor to the address display, and pick up the
8057 argument for @code{disassemble} by typing @kbd{C-x &}.
8058
8059 You can customize this further by defining elements of the list
8060 @code{gdb-print-command}; once it is defined, you can format or
8061 otherwise process numbers picked up by @kbd{C-x &} before they are
8062 inserted. A numeric argument to @kbd{C-x &} will both indicate that you
8063 wish special formatting, and act as an index to pick an element of the
8064 list. If the list element is a string, the number to be inserted is
8065 formatted using the Emacs function @code{format}; otherwise the number
8066 is passed as an argument to the corresponding list element.
8067 @end table
8068
8069 In any source file, the Emacs command @kbd{C-x SPC} (@code{gdb-break})
8070 tells @value{GDBN} to set a breakpoint on the source line point is on.
8071
8072 If you accidentally delete the source-display buffer, an easy way to get
8073 it back is to type the command @code{f} in the @value{GDBN} buffer, to
8074 request a frame display; when you run under Emacs, this will recreate
8075 the source buffer if necessary to show you the context of the current
8076 frame.
8077
8078 The source files displayed in Emacs are in ordinary Emacs buffers
8079 which are visiting the source files in the usual way. You can edit
8080 the files with these buffers if you wish; but keep in mind that @value{GDBN}
8081 communicates with Emacs in terms of line numbers. If you add or
8082 delete lines from the text, the line numbers that @value{GDBN} knows will cease
8083 to correspond properly with the code.
8084
8085 @c The following dropped because Epoch is nonstandard. Reactivate
8086 @c if/when v19 does something similar. ---pesch@cygnus.com 19dec1990
8087 @ignore
8088 @kindex emacs epoch environment
8089 @kindex epoch
8090 @kindex inspect
8091
8092 Version 18 of Emacs has a built-in window system called the @code{epoch}
8093 environment. Users of this environment can use a new command,
8094 @code{inspect} which performs identically to @code{print} except that
8095 each value is printed in its own window.
8096 @end ignore
8097 @end ifclear
8098
8099 @ifset LUCID
8100 @node Energize
8101 @chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Energize
8102
8103 @cindex Energize
8104 The Energize Programming System is an integrated development environment
8105 that includes a point-and-click interface to many programming tools.
8106 When you use @value{GDBN} in this environment, you can use the standard
8107 Energize graphical interface to drive @value{GDBN}; you can also, if you
8108 choose, type @value{GDBN} commands as usual in a debugging window. Even if
8109 you use the graphical interface, the debugging window (which uses Emacs,
8110 and resembles the standard Emacs interface to @value{GDBN}) displays the
8111 equivalent commands, so that the history of your debugging session is
8112 properly reflected.
8113
8114 When Energize starts up a @value{GDBN} session, it uses one of the
8115 command-line options @samp{-energize} or @samp{-cadillac} (``cadillac''
8116 is the name of the communications protocol used by the Energize system).
8117 This option makes @value{GDBN} run as one of the tools in the Energize Tool
8118 Set: it sends all output to the Energize kernel, and accept input from
8119 it as well.
8120
8121 See the user manual for the Energize Programming System for
8122 information on how to use the Energize graphical interface and the other
8123 development tools that Energize integrates with @value{GDBN}.
8124
8125 @end ifset
8126
8127 @node GDB Bugs
8128 @chapter Reporting Bugs in @value{GDBN}
8129 @cindex bugs in @value{GDBN}
8130 @cindex reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
8131
8132 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @value{GDBN} reliable.
8133
8134 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it
8135 may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help
8136 the entire community by making the next version of @value{GDBN} work better. Bug
8137 reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @value{GDBN}.
8138
8139 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8140 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8141
8142 @menu
8143 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8144 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8145 @end menu
8146
8147 @node Bug Criteria
8148 @section Have you found a bug?
8149 @cindex bug criteria
8150
8151 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8152
8153 @itemize @bullet
8154 @item
8155 @cindex fatal signal
8156 @cindex debugger crash
8157 @cindex crash of debugger
8158 If the debugger gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8159 @value{GDBN} bug. Reliable debuggers never crash.
8160
8161 @item
8162 @cindex error on valid input
8163 If @value{GDBN} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8164
8165 @item
8166 @cindex invalid input
8167 If @value{GDBN} does not produce an error message for invalid input,
8168 that is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of
8169 ``invalid input'' might be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support
8170 for traditional practice''.
8171
8172 @item
8173 If you are an experienced user of debugging tools, your suggestions
8174 for improvement of @value{GDBN} are welcome in any case.
8175 @end itemize
8176
8177 @node Bug Reporting
8178 @section How to report bugs
8179 @cindex bug reports
8180 @cindex @value{GDBN} bugs, reporting
8181
8182 A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
8183 If you obtained @value{GDBN} from a support organization, we recommend you
8184 contact that organization first.
8185
8186 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8187 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the GNU Emacs
8188 distribution.
8189
8190 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @value{GDBN} to one
8191 of these addresses:
8192
8193 @example
8194 bug-gdb@@prep.ai.mit.edu
8195 @{ucbvax|mit-eddie|uunet@}!prep.ai.mit.edu!bug-gdb
8196 @end example
8197
8198 @strong{Do not send bug reports to @samp{info-gdb}, or to
8199 @samp{help-gdb}, or to any newsgroups.} Most users of @value{GDBN} do not want to
8200 receive bug reports. Those that do, have arranged to receive @samp{bug-gdb}.
8201
8202 The mailing list @samp{bug-gdb} has a newsgroup @samp{gnu.gdb.bug} which
8203 serves as a repeater. The mailing list and the newsgroup carry exactly
8204 the same messages. Often people think of posting bug reports to the
8205 newsgroup instead of mailing them. This appears to work, but it has one
8206 problem which can be crucial: a newsgroup posting often lacks a mail
8207 path back to the sender. Thus, if we need to ask for more information,
8208 we may be unable to reach you. For this reason, it is better to send
8209 bug reports to the mailing list.
8210
8211 As a last resort, send bug reports on paper to:
8212
8213 @example
8214 GNU Debugger Bugs
8215 Free Software Foundation
8216 545 Tech Square
8217 Cambridge, MA 02139
8218 @end example
8219
8220 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8221 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8222 fact or leave it out, state it!
8223
8224 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8225 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8226 assume that the name of the variable you use in an example does not matter.
8227 Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a
8228 stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where that
8229 name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the contents
8230 of that location would fool the debugger into doing the right thing despite
8231 the bug. Play it safe and give a specific, complete example. That is the
8232 easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
8233
8234 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8235 the bug if it is new to us. It is not as important as what happens if
8236 the bug is already known. Therefore, always write your bug reports on
8237 the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8238
8239 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8240 bell?'' Those bug reports are useless, and we urge everyone to
8241 @emph{refuse to respond to them} except to chide the sender to report
8242 bugs properly.
8243
8244 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8245
8246 @itemize @bullet
8247 @item
8248 The version of @value{GDBN}. @value{GDBN} announces it if you start with no
8249 arguments; you can also print it at any time using @code{show version}.
8250
8251 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8252 the bug in the current version of @value{GDBN}.
8253
8254 @item
8255 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8256 version number.
8257
8258 @item
8259 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @value{GDBN}---e.g.
8260 ``@value{GCC}--2.0''.
8261
8262 @item
8263 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile the program you
8264 are debugging---e.g. ``@value{GCC}--2.0''.
8265
8266 @item
8267 The command arguments you gave the compiler to compile your example and
8268 observe the bug. For example, did you use @samp{-O}? To guarantee
8269 you will not omit something important, list them all. A copy of the
8270 Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8271
8272 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8273 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8274
8275 @item
8276 A complete input script, and all necessary source files, that will
8277 reproduce the bug.
8278
8279 @item
8280 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8281 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8282
8283 Of course, if the bug is that @value{GDBN} gets a fatal signal, then we will
8284 certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8285 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. We are human, after all. You
8286 might as well not give us a chance to make a mistake.
8287
8288 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8289 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as,
8290 your copy of @value{GDBN} is out of synch, or you have encountered a
8291 bug in the C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy
8292 might crash and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash,
8293 then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not
8294 happening for us. If you had not told us to expect a crash, then we
8295 would not be able to draw any conclusion from our observations.
8296
8297 @item
8298 If you wish to suggest changes to the @value{GDBN} source, send us context
8299 diffs. If you even discuss something in the @value{GDBN} source, refer to
8300 it by context, not by line number.
8301
8302 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8303 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8304 @end itemize
8305
8306 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8307
8308 @itemize @bullet
8309 @item
8310 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8311
8312 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8313 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8314 changes will not affect it.
8315
8316 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8317 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8318 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8319 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8320
8321 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8322 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8323 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8324 less time, and so on.
8325
8326 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8327 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8328
8329 @item
8330 A patch for the bug.
8331
8332 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8333 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8334 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8335 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8336
8337 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @value{GDBN} it is very hard to
8338 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8339 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able
8340 to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8341
8342 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8343 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8344 help us to understand.
8345
8346 @item
8347 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8348
8349 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8350 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8351 @end itemize
8352
8353 @c The readline documentation is distributed with the readline code
8354 @c and consists of the two following files:
8355 @c rluser.texinfo
8356 @c inc-hist.texi
8357 @c Use -I with makeinfo to point to the appropriate directory,
8358 @c environment var TEXINPUTS with TeX.
8359 @include rluser.texinfo
8360 @include inc-hist.texi
8361
8362 @ifset NOVEL
8363 @node Renamed Commands
8364 @appendix Renamed Commands
8365
8366 The following commands were renamed in GDB 4, in order to make the
8367 command set as a whole more consistent and easier to use and remember:
8368
8369 @kindex add-syms
8370 @kindex delete environment
8371 @kindex info copying
8372 @kindex info convenience
8373 @kindex info directories
8374 @kindex info editing
8375 @kindex info history
8376 @kindex info targets
8377 @kindex info values
8378 @kindex info version
8379 @kindex info warranty
8380 @kindex set addressprint
8381 @kindex set arrayprint
8382 @kindex set prettyprint
8383 @kindex set screen-height
8384 @kindex set screen-width
8385 @kindex set unionprint
8386 @kindex set vtblprint
8387 @kindex set demangle
8388 @kindex set asm-demangle
8389 @kindex set sevenbit-strings
8390 @kindex set array-max
8391 @kindex set caution
8392 @kindex set history write
8393 @kindex show addressprint
8394 @kindex show arrayprint
8395 @kindex show prettyprint
8396 @kindex show screen-height
8397 @kindex show screen-width
8398 @kindex show unionprint
8399 @kindex show vtblprint
8400 @kindex show demangle
8401 @kindex show asm-demangle
8402 @kindex show sevenbit-strings
8403 @kindex show array-max
8404 @kindex show caution
8405 @kindex show history write
8406 @kindex unset
8407
8408 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8409 @ifinfo
8410 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8411 @example
8412 OLD COMMAND NEW COMMAND
8413 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8414 --------------- -------------------------------
8415 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8416 add-syms add-symbol-file
8417 delete environment unset environment
8418 info convenience show convenience
8419 info copying show copying
8420 info directories show directories
8421 info editing show commands
8422 info history show values
8423 info targets help target
8424 info values show values
8425 info version show version
8426 info warranty show warranty
8427 set/show addressprint set/show print address
8428 set/show array-max set/show print elements
8429 set/show arrayprint set/show print array
8430 set/show asm-demangle set/show print asm-demangle
8431 set/show caution set/show confirm
8432 set/show demangle set/show print demangle
8433 set/show history write set/show history save
8434 set/show prettyprint set/show print pretty
8435 set/show screen-height set/show height
8436 set/show screen-width set/show width
8437 set/show sevenbit-strings set/show print sevenbit-strings
8438 set/show unionprint set/show print union
8439 set/show vtblprint set/show print vtbl
8440
8441 unset [No longer an alias for delete]
8442 @end example
8443 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8444 @end ifinfo
8445
8446 @tex
8447 \vskip \parskip\vskip \baselineskip
8448 \halign{\tt #\hfil &\qquad#&\tt #\hfil\cr
8449 {\bf Old Command} &&{\bf New Command}\cr
8450 add-syms &&add-symbol-file\cr
8451 delete environment &&unset environment\cr
8452 info convenience &&show convenience\cr
8453 info copying &&show copying\cr
8454 info directories &&show directories \cr
8455 info editing &&show commands\cr
8456 info history &&show values\cr
8457 info targets &&help target\cr
8458 info values &&show values\cr
8459 info version &&show version\cr
8460 info warranty &&show warranty\cr
8461 set{\rm / }show addressprint &&set{\rm / }show print address\cr
8462 set{\rm / }show array-max &&set{\rm / }show print elements\cr
8463 set{\rm / }show arrayprint &&set{\rm / }show print array\cr
8464 set{\rm / }show asm-demangle &&set{\rm / }show print asm-demangle\cr
8465 set{\rm / }show caution &&set{\rm / }show confirm\cr
8466 set{\rm / }show demangle &&set{\rm / }show print demangle\cr
8467 set{\rm / }show history write &&set{\rm / }show history save\cr
8468 set{\rm / }show prettyprint &&set{\rm / }show print pretty\cr
8469 set{\rm / }show screen-height &&set{\rm / }show height\cr
8470 set{\rm / }show screen-width &&set{\rm / }show width\cr
8471 set{\rm / }show sevenbit-strings &&set{\rm / }show print sevenbit-strings\cr
8472 set{\rm / }show unionprint &&set{\rm / }show print union\cr
8473 set{\rm / }show vtblprint &&set{\rm / }show print vtbl\cr
8474 \cr
8475 unset &&\rm(No longer an alias for delete)\cr
8476 }
8477 @end tex
8478 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8479 @end ifset
8480
8481 @ifclear PRECONFIGURED
8482 @node Formatting Documentation
8483 @appendix Formatting Documentation
8484
8485 @cindex GDB reference card
8486 @cindex reference card
8487 The GDB 4 release includes an already-formatted reference card, ready
8488 for printing with PostScript or GhostScript, in the @file{gdb}
8489 subdirectory of the main source directory@footnote{In
8490 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb/refcard.ps} of the version @value{GDBVN}
8491 release.}. If you can use PostScript or GhostScript with your printer,
8492 you can print the reference card immediately with @file{refcard.ps}.
8493
8494 The release also includes the source for the reference card. You
8495 can format it, using @TeX{}, by typing:
8496
8497 @example
8498 make refcard.dvi
8499 @end example
8500
8501 The GDB reference card is designed to print in landscape mode on US
8502 ``letter'' size paper; that is, on a sheet 11 inches wide by 8.5 inches
8503 high. You will need to specify this form of printing as an option to
8504 your @sc{dvi} output program.
8505
8506 @cindex documentation
8507
8508 All the documentation for GDB comes as part of the machine-readable
8509 distribution. The documentation is written in Texinfo format, which is
8510 a documentation system that uses a single source file to produce both
8511 on-line information and a printed manual. You can use one of the Info
8512 formatting commands to create the on-line version of the documentation
8513 and @TeX{} (or @code{texi2roff}) to typeset the printed version.
8514
8515 GDB includes an already formatted copy of the on-line Info version of
8516 this manual in the @file{gdb} subdirectory. The main Info file is
8517 @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/gdb/gdb.info}, and it refers to
8518 subordinate files matching @samp{gdb.info*} in the same directory. If
8519 necessary, you can print out these files, or read them with any editor;
8520 but they are easier to read using the @code{info} subsystem in GNU Emacs
8521 or the standalone @code{info} program, available as part of the GNU
8522 Texinfo distribution.
8523
8524 If you want to format these Info files yourself, you need one of the
8525 Info formatting programs, such as @code{texinfo-format-buffer} or
8526 @code{makeinfo}.
8527
8528 If you have @code{makeinfo} installed, and are in the top level GDB
8529 source directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, in the case of version @value{GDBVN}), you can
8530 make the Info file by typing:
8531
8532 @example
8533 cd gdb
8534 make gdb.info
8535 @end example
8536
8537 If you want to typeset and print copies of this manual, you need @TeX{},
8538 a program to print its @sc{dvi} output files, and @file{texinfo.tex}, the
8539 Texinfo definitions file.
8540
8541 @TeX{} is a typesetting program; it does not print files directly, but
8542 produces output files called @sc{dvi} files. To print a typeset
8543 document, you need a program to print @sc{dvi} files. If your system
8544 has @TeX{} installed, chances are it has such a program. The precise
8545 command to use depends on your system; @kbd{lpr -d} is common; another
8546 (for PostScript devices) is @kbd{dvips}. The @sc{dvi} print command may
8547 require a file name without any extension or a @samp{.dvi} extension.
8548
8549 @TeX{} also requires a macro definitions file called
8550 @file{texinfo.tex}. This file tells @TeX{} how to typeset a document
8551 written in Texinfo format. On its own, @TeX{} cannot read, much less
8552 typeset a Texinfo file. @file{texinfo.tex} is distributed with GDB
8553 and is located in the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/texinfo}
8554 directory.
8555
8556 If you have @TeX{} and a @sc{dvi} printer program installed, you can
8557 typeset and print this manual. First switch to the the @file{gdb}
8558 subdirectory of the main source directory (for example, to
8559 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb}) and then type:
8560
8561 @example
8562 make gdb.dvi
8563 @end example
8564
8565 @node Installing GDB
8566 @appendix Installing GDB
8567 @cindex configuring GDB
8568 @cindex installation
8569
8570 GDB comes with a @code{configure} script that automates the process
8571 of preparing GDB for installation; you can then use @code{make} to
8572 build the @code{gdb} program.
8573 @iftex
8574 @c irrelevant in info file; it's as current as the code it lives with.
8575 @footnote{If you have a more recent version of GDB than @value{GDBVN},
8576 look at the @file{README} file in the sources; we may have improved the
8577 installation procedures since publishing this manual.}
8578 @end iftex
8579
8580 The GDB distribution includes all the source code you need for GDB in
8581 a single directory, whose name is usually composed by appending the
8582 version number to @samp{gdb}.
8583
8584 For example, the GDB version @value{GDBVN} distribution is in the
8585 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory. That directory contains:
8586
8587 @table @code
8588 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure @r{(and supporting files)}
8589 script for configuring GDB and all its supporting libraries.
8590
8591 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb
8592 the source specific to GDB itself
8593
8594 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
8595 source for the Binary File Descriptor library
8596
8597 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/include
8598 GNU include files
8599
8600 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/libiberty
8601 source for the @samp{-liberty} free software library
8602
8603 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/opcodes
8604 source for the library of opcode tables and disassemblers
8605
8606 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/readline
8607 source for the GNU command-line interface
8608
8609 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/glob
8610 source for the GNU filename pattern-matching subroutine
8611
8612 @item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/mmalloc
8613 source for the GNU memory-mapped malloc package
8614 @end table
8615
8616 The simplest way to configure and build GDB is to run @code{configure}
8617 from the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory, which in
8618 this example is the @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory.
8619
8620 First switch to the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory
8621 if you are not already in it; then run @code{configure}. Pass the
8622 identifier for the platform on which GDB will run as an
8623 argument.
8624
8625 For example:
8626
8627 @example
8628 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
8629 ./configure @var{host}
8630 make
8631 @end example
8632
8633 @noindent
8634 where @var{host} is an identifier such as @samp{sun4} or
8635 @samp{decstation}, that identifies the platform where GDB will run.
8636 (You can often leave off @var{host}; @code{configure} tries to guess the
8637 correct value by examining your system.)
8638
8639 Running @samp{configure @var{host}} and then running @code{make} builds the
8640 @file{bfd}, @file{readline}, @file{mmalloc}, and @file{libiberty}
8641 libraries, then @code{gdb} itself. The configured source files, and the
8642 binaries, are left in the corresponding source directories.
8643
8644 @code{configure} is a Bourne-shell (@code{/bin/sh}) script; if your
8645 system does not recognize this automatically when you run a different
8646 shell, you may need to run @code{sh} on it explicitly:
8647
8648 @example
8649 sh configure @var{host}
8650 @end example
8651
8652 If you run @code{configure} from a directory that contains source
8653 directories for multiple libraries or programs, such as the
8654 @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} source directory for version @value{GDBVN}, @code{configure}
8655 creates configuration files for every directory level underneath (unless
8656 you tell it not to, with the @samp{--norecursion} option).
8657
8658 You can run the @code{configure} script from any of the
8659 subordinate directories in the GDB distribution if you only want to
8660 configure that subdirectory, but be sure to specify a path to it.
8661
8662 For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, type the following to configure only
8663 the @code{bfd} subdirectory:
8664
8665 @example
8666 @group
8667 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
8668 ../configure @var{host}
8669 @end group
8670 @end example
8671
8672 You can install @code{@value{GDBP}} anywhere; it has no hardwired paths.
8673 However, you should make sure that the shell on your path (named by
8674 the @samp{SHELL} environment variable) is publicly readable. Remember
8675 that GDB uses the shell to start your program---some systems refuse to
8676 let GDB debug child processes whose programs are not readable.
8677
8678 @menu
8679 * Separate Objdir:: Compiling GDB in another directory
8680 * Config Names:: Specifying names for hosts and targets
8681 * configure Options:: Summary of options for configure
8682 @end menu
8683
8684 @node Separate Objdir
8685 @section Compiling GDB in another directory
8686
8687 If you want to run GDB versions for several host or target machines,
8688 you need a different @code{gdb} compiled for each combination of
8689 host and target. @code{configure} is designed to make this easy by
8690 allowing you to generate each configuration in a separate subdirectory,
8691 rather than in the source directory. If your @code{make} program
8692 handles the @samp{VPATH} feature (GNU @code{make} does), running
8693 @code{make} in each of these directories builds the @code{gdb}
8694 program specified there.
8695
8696 To build @code{gdb} in a separate directory, run @code{configure}
8697 with the @samp{--srcdir} option to specify where to find the source.
8698 (You also need to specify a path to find @code{configure}
8699 itself from your working directory. If the path to @code{configure}
8700 would be the same as the argument to @samp{--srcdir}, you can leave out
8701 the @samp{--srcdir} option; it will be assumed.)
8702
8703 For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, you can build GDB in a separate
8704 directory for a Sun 4 like this:
8705
8706 @example
8707 @group
8708 cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
8709 mkdir ../gdb-sun4
8710 cd ../gdb-sun4
8711 ../gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure sun4
8712 make
8713 @end group
8714 @end example
8715
8716 When @code{configure} builds a configuration using a remote source
8717 directory, it creates a tree for the binaries with the same structure
8718 (and using the same names) as the tree under the source directory. In
8719 the example, you'd find the Sun 4 library @file{libiberty.a} in the
8720 directory @file{gdb-sun4/libiberty}, and GDB itself in
8721 @file{gdb-sun4/gdb}.
8722
8723 One popular reason to build several GDB configurations in separate
8724 directories is to configure GDB for cross-compiling (where GDB
8725 runs on one machine---the host---while debugging programs that run on
8726 another machine---the target). You specify a cross-debugging target by
8727 giving the @samp{--target=@var{target}} option to @code{configure}.
8728
8729 When you run @code{make} to build a program or library, you must run
8730 it in a configured directory---whatever directory you were in when you
8731 called @code{configure} (or one of its subdirectories).
8732
8733 The @code{Makefile} that @code{configure} generates in each source
8734 directory also runs recursively. If you type @code{make} in a source
8735 directory such as @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} (or in a separate configured
8736 directory configured with @samp{--srcdir=@var{path}/gdb-@value{GDBVN}}), you
8737 will build all the required libraries, and then build GDB.
8738
8739 When you have multiple hosts or targets configured in separate
8740 directories, you can run @code{make} on them in parallel (for example,
8741 if they are NFS-mounted on each of the hosts); they will not interfere
8742 with each other.
8743
8744 @node Config Names
8745 @section Specifying names for hosts and targets
8746
8747 The specifications used for hosts and targets in the @code{configure}
8748 script are based on a three-part naming scheme, but some short predefined
8749 aliases are also supported. The full naming scheme encodes three pieces
8750 of information in the following pattern:
8751
8752 @example
8753 @var{architecture}-@var{vendor}-@var{os}
8754 @end example
8755
8756 For example, you can use the alias @code{sun4} as a @var{host} argument,
8757 or as the value for @var{target} in a @code{--target=@var{target}}
8758 option. The equivalent full name is @samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}.
8759
8760 The @code{configure} script accompanying GDB does not provide
8761 any query facility to list all supported host and target names or
8762 aliases. @code{configure} calls the Bourne shell script
8763 @code{config.sub} to map abbreviations to full names; you can read the
8764 script, if you wish, or you can use it to test your guesses on
8765 abbreviations---for example:
8766
8767 @smallexample
8768 % sh config.sub sun4
8769 sparc-sun-sunos4.1.1
8770 % sh config.sub sun3
8771 m68k-sun-sunos4.1.1
8772 % sh config.sub decstation
8773 mips-dec-ultrix4.2
8774 % sh config.sub hp300bsd
8775 m68k-hp-bsd
8776 % sh config.sub i386v
8777 i386-unknown-sysv
8778 % sh config.sub i786v
8779 Invalid configuration `i786v': machine `i786v' not recognized
8780 @end smallexample
8781
8782 @noindent
8783 @code{config.sub} is also distributed in the GDB source
8784 directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, for version @value{GDBVN}).
8785
8786 @node configure Options
8787 @section @code{configure} options
8788
8789 Here is a summary of the @code{configure} options and arguments that
8790 are most often useful for building @value{GDBN}. @code{configure} also has
8791 several other options not listed here. @inforef{What Configure
8792 Does,,configure.info}, for a full explanation of @code{configure}.
8793 @c FIXME: Would this be more, or less, useful as an xref (ref to printed
8794 @c manual in the printed manual, ref to info file only from the info file)?
8795
8796 @example
8797 configure @r{[}--help@r{]}
8798 @r{[}--prefix=@var{dir}@r{]}
8799 @r{[}--srcdir=@var{path}@r{]}
8800 @r{[}--norecursion@r{]} @r{[}--rm@r{]}
8801 @r{[}--target=@var{target}@r{]} @var{host}
8802 @end example
8803
8804 @noindent
8805 You may introduce options with a single @samp{-} rather than
8806 @samp{--} if you prefer; but you may abbreviate option names if you use
8807 @samp{--}.
8808
8809 @table @code
8810 @item --help
8811 Display a quick summary of how to invoke @code{configure}.
8812
8813 @item -prefix=@var{dir}
8814 Configure the source to install programs and files under directory
8815 @file{@var{dir}}.
8816
8817 @c avoid splitting the warning from the explanation:
8818 @need 2000
8819 @item --srcdir=@var{path}
8820 @strong{Warning: using this option requires GNU @code{make}, or another
8821 @code{make} that implements the @code{VPATH} feature.}@*
8822 Use this option to make configurations in directories separate from the
8823 GDB source directories. Among other things, you can use this to
8824 build (or maintain) several configurations simultaneously, in separate
8825 directories. @code{configure} writes configuration specific files in
8826 the current directory, but arranges for them to use the source in the
8827 directory @var{path}. @code{configure} will create directories under
8828 the working directory in parallel to the source directories below
8829 @var{path}.
8830
8831 @item --norecursion
8832 Configure only the directory level where @code{configure} is executed; do not
8833 propagate configuration to subdirectories.
8834
8835 @item --rm
8836 @emph{Remove} files otherwise built during configuration.
8837
8838 @c This does not work (yet if ever). FIXME.
8839 @c @item --parse=@var{lang} @dots{}
8840 @c Configure the GDB expression parser to parse the listed languages.
8841 @c @samp{all} configures GDB for all supported languages. To get a
8842 @c list of all supported languages, omit the argument. Without this
8843 @c option, GDB is configured to parse all supported languages.
8844
8845 @item --target=@var{target}
8846 Configure GDB for cross-debugging programs running on the specified
8847 @var{target}. Without this option, GDB is configured to debug
8848 programs that run on the same machine (@var{host}) as GDB itself.
8849
8850 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available targets.
8851
8852 @item @var{host} @dots{}
8853 Configure GDB to run on the specified @var{host}.
8854
8855 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available hosts.
8856 @end table
8857
8858 @noindent
8859 @code{configure} accepts other options, for compatibility with
8860 configuring other GNU tools recursively; but these are the only
8861 options that affect GDB or its supporting libraries.
8862 @end ifclear
8863
8864 @node Index
8865 @unnumbered Index
8866
8867 @printindex cp
8868
8869 @tex
8870 % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8871 % meantime:
8872 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8873 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8874 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8875 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8876 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8877 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/},}
8878 \centerline{{\bf\fontname\tenbf}, and}
8879 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8880 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8881 \page\colophon
8882 % Blame: pesch@cygnus.com, 1991.
8883 @end tex
8884
8885 @contents
8886 @bye